JP6666887B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a resilient pachinko gaming machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine includes a main control board that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control board that controls the effect of the game through the control of the liquid crystal display and the accessories on the game board. Some gaming machines switch to a special mode such as a store setting mode by turning on a power switch while pressing an effect button. Patent Document 1 discloses a technique relating to this type of gaming machine.

JP 2014-239952 A

  By the way, in this type of gaming machine, if the cooperation between the main control board and the effect control board is not made smoothly, there is a possibility that the interest of the game may be spoiled.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to enable smooth cooperation between a main control board and an effect control board in a gaming machine.

  In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention executes each lottery including a jackpot lottery, controls the progress of the game based on the lottery result, and plays a game command related to the progress of the game and a special command unrelated to the progress of the game. A main control unit capable of generating a plurality of types of commands including a command, a production unit for displaying an image and outputting a sound, a command received by the main control unit, and a control of the production unit based on the received command. A gaming machine comprising: an effect control means for determining contents and controlling the effect means in accordance with the determination; and an operation means for performing an operation relating to setting of the main control means, wherein the main control means and the effect control means Are capable of independent operation triggered by power-on, and when the main control means is turned on with the operation means in a predetermined state, the lottery When the main control unit is in the setting mode and the received command is the game command, the effect control unit shifts to a setting mode related to the setting related to the setting mode. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the present invention, cooperation between the main control board and the effect control board in the gaming machine can be performed smoothly.

It is a front view of the game machine which is a 1st embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing a state in which a first movable auditorium 330a in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 descends. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating a state in which a second movable role object 330b in the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1 is tilted. FIG. 2 is a view showing a state where a third movable auditorium 330c in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 opens and closes. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the kind of jackpot in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1, and the combination of left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R, and fourth symbol 36Z. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating a mode of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. . FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is an assembly diagram showing an effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an operation procedure of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an operation procedure of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an operation procedure of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an operation procedure of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating main commands of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing main processing of a main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing initialization processing of a main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing initialization processing of a main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a setting change mode process of a main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation mode process of a main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing power-off monitoring processing of a main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process of a main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an input control process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a first starting port detection switch input process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing a special symbol holding storage area of a main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 and an effect information storage area of an effect control board. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating a preliminary determination table of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure special power control process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage determination process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit determination processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a normal symbol lottery determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing a symbol determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating a fluctuation pattern determination table of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating a fluctuation pattern determination table of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a special symbol changing process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a view showing a special game control table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing a special winning opening opening / closing control table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game end process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a view showing a special game end time setting table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a general-purpose general-purpose control process of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing main processing of an effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing an initialization process of an effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating a display example of a display image of the image display device of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating a display example of a display image of the image display device of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating a display example of a display image of the image display device of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a setting change notification image display control process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating a display example of a display image of the image display device of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing special command analysis processing during setting change of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. 2 is an example of a command execution mode determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an example of a command execution mode of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an example of a command execution mode of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an example of a command execution mode of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an example of a command execution mode of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an example of a command execution mode of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an example of a command execution mode of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the game command analysis processing during the setting change of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 is an example of a command execution mode determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an example of a command execution mode of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an example of a command execution mode of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an example of a command execution mode of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation notification image display control process of an effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating a display example of a display image of the image display device of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing special command analysis processing during setting confirmation of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. 2 is an example of a command execution mode determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an example of a command execution mode of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an example of a command execution mode of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an example of a command execution mode of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an example of a command execution mode of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an example of a command execution mode of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the game command analysis processing during the setting confirmation of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 is an example of a command execution mode determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an example of a command execution mode of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an example of a command execution mode of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating an example of a command execution mode of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process of an effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating a fluctuation effect pattern determination table of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead effect effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a view showing a look-ahead effect effect execution determination table and a final stage effect display mode determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing a look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing a look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol determination processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an SP specific announcement effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an SP-specific announcement effect execution determination table and an SPU-specific announcement effect execution timing determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing an SPSP specific notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an SPSP specific notice effect execution determination table and a SPSP notice notice effect execution timing determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart showing a dialogue operation effect operation result determination process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a dialogue speaker determination table and a dialogue determination table of an effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart showing a dialogue operation specific notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a dialogue operation specific notice effect execution determination table and a call operation specific notice effect execution timing determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a surprise operation specific announcement effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a shortened fluctuation announcement effect execution determination table and a shortened fluctuation announcement effect execution timing determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the loss notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a loss notice effect execution determination table and a loss notice effect execution timing determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the mode effect control processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a stage change determination process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing a stage change execution determination table of an effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing a new stage determination table of an effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing a stage change timing determination table of an effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a view showing a stage change announcement effect execution determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a stage change announcement effect execution timing determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a stage change announcement effect selection process during a change in the effect of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change notice effect selection process during the stop of the design of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special game effect selection processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the round game effect control processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special training mode start control processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a live mode start control process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing contents of an operation information storage area of an effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 and an example of updating the contents. 2 is a flowchart showing a timer updating process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a figure showing a stage change announcement effect execution timing decision table of the gaming machine which is the second embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of a command execution mode determination table of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a command execution mode of a gaming machine which is a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a command execution mode of a gaming machine which is a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a command execution mode of a gaming machine which is a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a command execution mode of a gaming machine which is a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a command execution mode of a gaming machine which is a third embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of a command execution mode determination table of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a command execution mode of a gaming machine which is a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a command execution mode of a gaming machine which is a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a command execution mode of a gaming machine which is a third embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of a command execution mode determination table of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a command execution mode of a gaming machine which is a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a command execution mode of a gaming machine which is a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a command execution mode of a gaming machine which is a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a command execution mode of a gaming machine which is a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a command execution mode of a gaming machine which is a third embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of a command execution mode determination table of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a command execution mode of a gaming machine which is a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a command execution mode of a gaming machine which is a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a command execution mode of a gaming machine which is a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an operation procedure of a game machine which is a fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an operation procedure of a game machine which is a fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is an assembly drawing showing the production control board of a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an operation procedure of a game machine which is a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an operation procedure of a game machine which is a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an operation procedure of a game machine which is a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an operation procedure of a game machine which is a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an operation procedure of a game machine which is a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an operation procedure of a game machine which is a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an operation procedure of a game machine which is a seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an operation procedure of a game machine which is a seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of a command execution mode determination table of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of a command execution mode determination table of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of a command execution mode determination table of the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of a command execution mode determination table of the gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention.

<First embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the entire gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 1, the housing of the gaming machine 1 has a rectangular outer frame 60 and a glass door 50 that covers the game area 6 of the outer frame 60 so as to be visible.

  One end of the glass door 50 (the left side facing the gaming machine 1) is connected to the outer frame 60 via a hinge mechanism 51. A lock mechanism is provided on the other end of the glass door 50 (on the right side of the gaming machine 1). When the lock mechanism of the glass door 50 is unlocked by a dedicated key, the glass door 50 can be swung by the hinge mechanism 51 to open the game area 6. The glass door 50 is provided with a door opening switch 18a for detecting the opening of the glass door 50.

  Outside the portion of the glass door 50 that covers the game area 6, a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a first special symbol reservation display 23, a second special symbol reservation display 24, a normal A symbol display device 22 and a normal symbol hold display 25 are provided.

  The first special symbol display device 20 notifies a result of a lottery lottery performed when a game ball enters the first starting port 14 of the game area 6 (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “start winning prize”). It is. The second special symbol display device 21 informs of a lottery result of a jackpot lottery performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 15 of the game area 6 (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “start winning”). is there. The first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 variably display a plurality of types of special symbols each of which can be identified. The first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 are configured by 7-segment LEDs. In the following description, a special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 is appropriately referred to as a “first special symbol”, and a special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 21 is appropriately referred to as a “second special symbol”. Design ".

  The first special symbol hold display 23 displays the number of changes in the first special symbol held. The second special symbol hold indicator 24 displays the number of changes in the second special symbol held.

  Here, the suspension of the change of the first special symbol is based on the establishment of the start condition for executing the change of the first special symbol by the start winning of the first opening 14, but the satisfaction of the previously established start condition. Occurs when the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed or when a special game is being executed.

  Similarly, the suspension of the change of the second special symbol is based on the establishment of the start condition for executing the change of the second special symbol by the start winning of the second start opening 15, but the satisfaction of the previously established start condition. Occurs when the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed or when a special game is being executed.

  Each of the first special symbol reservation display 23 and the second special symbol reservation display 24 is composed of two left and right LEDs. The display mode of the number of reservations on the first special symbol reservation display 23 and the second special symbol reservation display 24 will be specifically described. In the first special symbol reservation display 23, the number of reservations of the change of the first special symbol is changed. In the case of one LED, the left LED is turned on. When the number of pending changes of the first special symbol is two, the right LED is turned on. When the number of pending changes of the first special symbol is three, the left LED blinks and the right LED lights. If the number of pending changes of the first special symbol is four, the left and right two LEDs blink. The display mode of the number of reservations on the second special symbol reservation display 24 is the same as that of the first special symbol reservation display 23.

  The ordinary symbol display device 22 notifies the result of the ordinary symbol lottery performed when a game ball passes through the ordinary symbol gate 13. The ordinary symbol display device 22 variably displays a plurality of types of ordinary symbols that can be identified. The normal symbol hold display 25 displays the number of hold of the change of the normal symbol. The normal symbol hold display 25 is composed of two left and right LEDs. The display mode of the number of reserves on the ordinary symbol hold display 25 is the same as that of the first special symbol hold display 23 and the second special symbol hold display 24.

  The game area 6 of the gaming machine 1 has a substantially egg shape. The game area 6 is divided into a left area 6L on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right area 6R on the right side. At the left end of the left region 6L, there are provided rails 5a and 5b extending in an arc shape with a slightly wider interval than the game ball therebetween. A ball return preventing piece 5c is provided at the upper end of the inner rail 5b among these rails 5a and 5b.

  An effect button 35 is provided below a portion of the glass door 50 that covers the game area 6. The effect button 35 is for changing the effect mode by a pressing operation. The effect button 35 is provided with an effect button detection switch 35a. When the effect button detection switch 35a detects that the effect button 35 has been pressed, it outputs an ON signal indicating that fact.

  A cross key 39 is provided to the left of the effect button 35. The cross key 39 includes an up cursor key 39A, a down cursor key 39B, a left cursor key 39C, and a right cursor key 39D. A center key 39E is provided at a position surrounded by the up cursor key 39A, the down cursor key 39B, the left cursor key 39C, and the right cursor key 39D.

  The up cursor key 39A, down cursor key 39B, left cursor key 39C, and right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39 are provided with cross key detection switches 39a, 39b, 39c, and 39d. The center key 39E is provided with a center key detection switch 39e. When detecting that the up cursor key 39A has been pressed, the cross key detection switch 39a outputs an ON signal indicating this. When detecting that the down cursor key 39B has been pressed, the cross key detection switch 39b outputs an ON signal indicating this. When detecting that the left cursor key 39C has been pressed, the cross key detection switch 39c outputs an ON signal indicating that. When detecting that the right cursor key 39D has been pressed, the cross key detection switch 39d outputs an ON signal indicating that. When detecting that the center key 39E has been pressed, the center key detection switch 39e outputs an ON signal indicating this.

  On the glass door 50, on the back side of the effect button 35, a saucer for storing game balls is provided. The operation handle 3 is provided at the lower right of the effect button 35 on the glass door 50. The player performs a firing operation which is an operation of gripping the operation handle 3 with his / her right hand and turning it clockwise.

  A touch sensor 3a is provided in the operation handle 3. The touch sensor 3a is configured by a capacitance-type proximity switch that uses a change in capacitance due to a contact of the player with the operation handle 3. The tray of the glass door 50 is provided with a ball feed solenoid 4b. The ball feed solenoid 4b is constituted by a straight-moving solenoid. A firing volume 3b and a firing solenoid 4a are provided near the rotating portion of the operation handle 3. The firing volume 3b is composed of a variable resistor. The firing solenoid 4a is composed of a rotary solenoid.

  These units 3a, 3b, 4a, and 4b perform operations related to the launch of the game balls in the saucer to the game area 6 under the control of the launch control board 160. More specifically, when the player's hand touches the operation handle 3, the touch sensor 3a supplies a touch signal indicating that to the firing control board 160. When the player's hand turns the operation handle 3, the firing volume 3 b outputs a voltage divided according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 3 to the firing control board 160. The firing control board 160 performs control to energize the firing solenoid 4a and the ball feed solenoid 4b based on the output voltage of the firing volume 3b while the touch signal is supplied from the touch sensor 3a.

  The ball feed solenoid 4b feeds the game balls in the receiving tray one by one toward the launching member directly connected to the firing solenoid 4a by controlling the energization of the firing control board 160. The firing solenoid 4a rotates the driving member. The game ball sent out from the tray toward the striking member is struck between the rails 5a and 5b by the rotation of the striking member, and is guided upward by the rails 5a and 5b. The game ball that has risen between the rails 5a and 5b reaches the game area 6 through the ball return preventing piece 5c, and falls in the game area 6 in an unpredictable manner.

  Here, the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 4a is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 160. Thus, the number of shots per minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute) because one shot is fired each time the firing solenoid 4a rotates once. That is, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds.

  At the upper part of the game area 6, there is provided a decorative member 7 which affects the flow of the game ball. At the upper part of the game area 6 behind the decorative member 7 and at the right end of the game area 6, effect driving devices 33a and 33b are provided. The effect driving devices 33a and 33b effect a game by the movement of the device itself under the control of the lamp control board 140. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the effect driving device 33a includes an annular first movable role 330a and an actuator that supports the upper edge thereof. When the effect driving device 33a receives a signal instructing the driving of the first movable accessory 330a from the lamp control board 140, the effect driving device 33a is at a position on the back side of the decorative member 7 above the game area 6 (the position shown in FIG. 1). The first movable role 330a is lowered to the center position of the game area 6 (the position shown in FIG. 4). As shown in FIG. 5, the effect driving device 33b has a stick-shaped second movable role 330b and an actuator supporting the lower end thereof. When receiving a signal instructing driving of the second movable role 330b from the lamp control board 140, the effect driving device 33b moves the second movable role 330b from the right end position of the game area 6 (the position shown in FIG. 1). The game area 6 is inclined toward the center position (the position shown in FIG. 5).

  At a position slightly inside the left and right corners of the upper part of the glass door 50 of the gaming machine 1, an effect driving device 33c is provided. Each of the left and right effect drive devices 33c contains three effect lighting devices (lamp) 34. The effect drive device 33c and the effect lighting device 34 perform an effect of a game by the movement of the device itself and light emission under the control of the lamp control board 140. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the effect driving device 33c includes left and right third movable members 330c and actuators that support the side ends thereof. When receiving a signal instructing the driving of the third movable role 330c from the lamp control board 140, the performance driving device 33c moves the third movable role 330c to a position that covers the performance lighting device 34 (the position illustrated in FIG. 1). ) And the position to be exposed (the position shown in FIG. 6). Further, the effect lighting device 34 blinks when receiving a drive signal from the lamp control board 140.

  An audio output device 32 (speaker) is provided inside the left and right effect driving devices 33c above the glass door 50 of the gaming machine 1. Under the control of the image control board 150, the sound output device 32 performs a game effect by sound (output of various background music (BGM) and output of a sound effect).

  A plurality of general winning openings 12 are provided below the left area 6L in the game area 6. The general winning opening 12 is provided with a general winning opening detection switch 12a for detecting the passage of a game ball in the general winning opening 12. When the general winning opening detection switch 12a detects the passage of a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out.

  A first special winning opening 16 is provided below the right area 6R in the gaming area 6. The first special winning opening 16 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. The first special winning opening 16 is provided with a first special winning opening detection switch 16a for detecting the entry of a game ball in the first special winning opening 16. When the first special winning opening detection switch 16a detects the entry of a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls is paid out.

  The first special winning opening 16 is provided with a first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b, which is a special electric accessory, and a first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c for switching the opening and closing of the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b. . The first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b has a rectangular plate shape having substantially the same dimensions as the first special winning opening 16. The lower edge of the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b is pivotally attached to the lower edge of the first special winning opening 16. When the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c is turned off, the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b stands substantially flush with the board surface of the game area 6 and enters a closed state in which the first special winning opening 16 is closed. When the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c is turned on, the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in an open state inclined forward with the lower edge of the first special winning opening 16 as a fulcrum.

  While the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in the closed state, game balls falling from above the first special winning opening 16 pass through the front of the first special winning opening 16 as they are. Therefore, while the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in the closed state, the game ball does not enter the first special winning opening 16. On the other hand, while the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling from above the first special winning opening 16 are directed above the first special winning opening / closing door 16b. It hits the receiving surface and is guided to the first big winning opening 16 side. For this reason, while the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in the open state, the game balls can easily enter the first special winning opening 16.

  A second big winning opening 17 is provided at the lower center of the game area 6. The second special winning opening 17 is provided with a second special winning opening detection switch 17a for detecting the entry of a game ball in the second special winning opening 17. When the second special winning opening detection switch 17a detects the entry of a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of the game balls are paid out.

  The second special winning opening 17 is provided with a second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b, which is a special electric accessory, and a second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c for opening and closing the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b. . The second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b has a rectangular plate shape having substantially the same dimensions as the second special winning opening 17. The lower edge of the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b is pivotally attached to the lower edge of the second special winning opening 17. When the second winning opening / closing solenoid 17c is turned off, the second winning opening / closing door 17b stands substantially flush with the board of the game area 6 and enters a closed state in which the second winning opening 17 is closed. When the second big win opening / closing solenoid 17c is turned on, the second big winning opening / closing door 17b is in an open state inclined forward with the lower edge of the second big winning opening 17 as a fulcrum.

  While the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b is in the closed state, game balls falling from diagonally above and to the left of the second special winning opening 17 pass directly in front of the second special winning opening 17. I do. For this reason, while the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b is in the closed state, the game ball does not enter the second special winning opening 17. On the other hand, while the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling from above the second special winning opening 17 are directed upward of the second special winning opening / closing door 17b. It hits the receiving surface and is guided to the side of the second big winning opening 17. For this reason, while the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b is in the open state, the game balls can easily enter the second special winning opening 17.

  A first starting port 14 and a second starting port 15 are provided above the second big winning port 17 at the lower center of the game area 6. The first starting port 14 and the second starting port 15 are arranged vertically. The first starting port 14 is provided with a first starting port detection switch 14a for detecting the passage of a game ball at the first starting port 14. When the first starting port detection switch 14a detects the passage of the game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out.

  The second starting port 15 is provided with a second starting port detection switch 15a for detecting the passage of the game ball at the second starting port 15. When the second starting port detection switch 15a detects the passage of the game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out.

  The second starting port 15 is provided with a pair of movable pieces 15b. These movable pieces 15b can be switched between open and closed states by a starting port opening and closing solenoid 15c. When the starting opening / closing solenoid 15c is turned off, the pair of movable pieces 15b enter a closed state in which each of the movable pieces 15b stands upright. When the starting opening / closing solenoid 15c is turned on, the pair of movable pieces 15b enter an open state in which the pair of movable pieces 15b are inclined in an inverted C shape. The movable piece 15b forms an electric tulip (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as an "electric tuy") as an ordinary electric accessory. While the movable piece 15b is in the closed state, most of the game balls falling toward the second starting port 15 from diagonally above and below the second starting port 15 hit the outer surface of the movable piece 15b and rebound. For this reason, while the movable piece 15b is in the closed state, it becomes difficult for the game ball to pass through the second starting port 15. On the other hand, while the movable piece 15b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling toward the second starting port 15 from diagonally above and below the second starting port 15 are guided to the inner surface of the movable piece 15b. The second starting port 15 is reached. For this reason, while the movable piece 15b is in the open state, the game ball easily passes through the second starting port 15.

  A normal symbol gate 13 is provided at a position slightly above the first special winning opening 16 in the right area 6R of the gaming area 6. The ordinary symbol gate 13 is provided with a gate detection switch 13a for detecting the passage of a game ball in the ordinary symbol gate 13.

  Here, in the gaming machine 1, a jackpot is established when the start condition of the first special symbol is established by the winning start of the first opening 14 and the start condition of the second special symbol is established by the winning start of the second opening 15. When the lottery is executed and the jackpot is won, the corresponding one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped at a symbol corresponding to the type of the jackpot through a variable display for a predetermined period, and the stop symbol indicates. A special game according to the type of jackpot is executed. In the special game, the first special winning opening 16 or the second special winning opening 17 until the winning number of the first special winning opening 16 or the second special winning opening 17 reaches the specified number or the opening time reaches the specified time. Is a round game of one round, and this round game is repeated a plurality of times. There are seven types of jackpots of the gaming machine 1 as follows.

a1. 1st 16R probability change This big hit is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol is a big hit. In the special game when the big hit is won, 16 round games from the first round to the 16th round are performed. In each of the 16 round games, the first large winning opening 16 is opened until the winning number of the first large winning opening 16 reaches a specified number (for example, 9) or 29 seconds elapse → the first large winning opening for 2 seconds. The first winning opening 16 is opened and closed in a manner of opening and closing the winning opening 16.

  When this big hit is won, the game state related to the big hit lottery after the end of the special game becomes the high-probability game state which is advantageous to the player among the two states of the low-probability game state and the high-probability game state. In the gaming machine 1, in the low-probability gaming state, the jackpot lottery probability is set 1 (the jackpot lottery winning probability is 2/599), the setting 2 (the jackpot lottery winning probability is 2/579), and the setting 3 (the jackpot lottery winning). Probability is 2/549), setting 4 (winning probability of jackpot is 2/529), setting 5 (winning probability of jackpot is 2/509), and setting 6 (winning probability of jackpot is 2/489) You can choose from six levels. The jackpot lottery probability in the high-probability gaming state is 20/599 common to all settings.

  The probability in the high-probability gaming state may be 10 times higher than the low probability, which is common to all settings. Specifically, setting 1 (the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the high-probability gaming state is 20/599), setting 2 (the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the high-probability gaming state is 20/579), and setting 3 (the high-probability gaming state) , The winning probability of the jackpot lottery of 20/549), setting 4 (the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the high-probability gaming state is 20/529), setting 5 (the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the high-probability gaming state is 20/509), And setting 6 (the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the high-probability gaming state is 20/489).

  When the jackpot is won, the game state related to the ordinary electric auditors (movable piece 15b) after the end of the special game is changed to the electric chew support state (movable piece 15b is frequently opened for a long time and the second starting port 15 is opened). Of the two states of the starting winning prize state and the non-electric chewing support state (the movable piece 15b is hard to be opened), the electric chewing support state is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state related to the special symbol is time. Of two states, a shortened state (a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is relatively short) and a non-time shortened state (a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is relatively long), the time shortened state is advantageous to the player. . The state relating to the ordinary electric accessory and the state relating to the special symbol depend on each other. When the state relating to the ordinary electric accessory becomes the electric chew support state, the state relating to the special symbol becomes a time reduction state. In the following description, a state in which the state related to the ordinary electric auditorium is the electric chew support state and the state relating to the special symbol is the time shortening state is referred to as a “time reduction game state”, and the state relating to the ordinary electric auditorium is non-operational. The state in which the electric chew support state and the state relating to the special symbol are the non-time shortening state is referred to as a "non-time saving gaming state".

  During the non-time-saving gaming state, the gaming machine 1 has a normal symbol lottery winning probability of 1/65536, a normal symbol fluctuation time of 29 seconds, and a normal symbol lottery winning time of the second starting port 15 per one time. The opening time of the movable piece 15b is 0.2 seconds. During the time-saving gaming state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery is 65535/65536, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is 3 seconds, and the movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15 per election of the ordinary symbol lottery is won. The opening time is 3.5 seconds.

  The winning probability of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the movable piece 15b are common regardless of the setting of the jackpot lottery probability from the setting 1 to the setting 6.

  When the jackpot is won, the gaming state becomes the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state after the special game, and then continues until the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state win the jackpot again.

b1. The first 8R probability change jackpot This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the big hit is won, eight round games of the first to eighth rounds are performed. In the eight round games, the second large winning opening 17 is opened until the winning number of the second large winning opening 17 reaches a specified number (for example, 9) or 29 seconds elapse → the second big winning for 2 seconds. The second big winning opening 17 is opened and closed in an opening and closing manner of closing the opening 17. When this big hit is won, the game state after the end of the special game is a high probability game state and a time reduction game state. The high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state continue until the jackpot is won again.

c1. 1st 8R normal winning This big hit is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol is a big hit. In the special game when the big hit is won, eight round games of the first to eighth rounds are performed. The manner of opening and closing the second special winning opening 17 in the eight round games is the same as that for the first 8R probability change. When this jackpot is won, the game state after the end of the special game is a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state. The low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state continue until the jackpot is won again or the number of fluctuations after the special game reaches 100 without winning the jackpot.

d1. 1st 2R probability change jackpot This jackpot is one of those which can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game in which this jackpot is won, two round games of a first round and a second round are performed. In the two round games, the second large winning opening 17 is opened until the winning number of the second large winning opening 17 reaches a specified number (for example, nine) or 0.4 seconds elapse → the second second winning for 2 seconds. The second special winning opening 17 is opened and closed in an opening and closing manner of closing the special winning opening 17. When this big hit is won, the game state after the end of the special game is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state. The high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state continue until the jackpot is won again. Here, the time required for the special game when the jackpot is won (total opening time of the special winning opening) is compared with the time required for the special game when the other jackpot is won (the total opening time of the special winning port). short. Therefore, the number of acquired game balls increases when the other jackpot is won than when the jackpot is won. The first special map 2R probability change hit is also referred to as a "short hit" or a "rapid hit" in the sense of a big hit that becomes a high-probability gaming state through a short hit.

f1. 2nd 16R probability change jackpot This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the big hit is won, 16 round games from the first round to the 16th round are performed. The manner of opening and closing the first special winning opening 16 in the 16 round games is the same as that for the first 16R probability change. When this big hit is won, the game state after the end of the special game is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state. The high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state continue until the jackpot is won again.

g1. 2nd 8R probability change This big hit is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a big hit. In the special game when the big hit is won, eight round games of the first to eighth rounds are performed. The manner of opening and closing the second special winning opening 17 in the eight round games is the same as that for the first 8R probability change. When this big hit is won, the game state after the end of the special game is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state. The high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state continue until the jackpot is won again.

i1. Second 8R normal hit This big hit is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a big hit. In the special game when the big hit is won, eight round games of the first to eighth rounds are performed. The manner of opening and closing the second special winning opening 17 in the eight round games is the same as that for the first 8R probability change. When this jackpot is won, the game state after the end of the special game is a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state. The low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state continue until the jackpot is won again or the jackpot is not won until the number of changes in the special symbol after the special game reaches 100.

  In addition, the number of rounds, the number of winning rules, the number of open hours of the special winning opening, the number of time-saving gaming machine states, and the distribution of each big hit symbol obtained by the big hit of each special map, the setting of the big hit lottery probability are set 1 to 6 Whichever is the same.

  In the following description, the first 16R probability change, the first 8R probability change, the first 2R probability change, the second 16R probability change, and the second 8R probability change are collectively referred to as “probable change”. . In addition, the first 8R normal hit and the second 8R normal hit are collectively referred to as “normal hit” as appropriate. In addition, the first 16R probability variation and the second 16R probability variation are collectively referred to as “16R variation”. The first 8R probability variation, the first 8R normal variation, the second 8R probability variation, and the second 8R normal variation are collectively referred to as “8R per variation”. The first 2R probability variation is appropriately referred to as “2R variation”.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not a normal symbol hits or not is executed in response to establishment of a normal symbol starting condition by passing a game ball through the normal symbol gate 13, and a win in this normal symbol lottery is performed. In this case, the movable piece 15b, which is usually an electric accessory, is opened for a predetermined period. While the movable piece 15b is in the open state, the game ball easily passes through the second starting port 15, so that the starting condition of the second special symbol is easily satisfied.

  At the center of the bottom of the game area 6, an out port 11 is provided. Game balls that reach the bottom of the game area 6 without entering any of the general winning opening 12, the first starting opening 14, the second starting opening 15, the first large winning opening 16, and the second large winning opening 17. Is discharged through the outlet 11.

  An image display device 31 is fitted between the decoration member 7 and the first starting port 14 in the game area 6. The image display device 31 performs a game effect by displaying images under the control of the image control board 150.

  More specifically, the gaming machine 1 performs a symbol variation effect in accordance with the symbol variation from the start to the stop of the variation of the special symbol. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the symbol variation effect, the image display device 31 displays a left symbol 36L, a middle symbol 36C, a right symbol 36R, and a fourth symbol 36Z (hereinafter, these symbols 36L, 36C, 36R). , 36Z are appropriately referred to as “effect design 36”). The left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are caused to change in synchronization with the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21, and the first special symbol display device 20 and the second symbol symbol 36Z. The same big hit determination result as that indicated by the special symbol of the special symbol display device 21 is notified.

  The symbols displayed as the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R include "1" symbol, "2" symbol, "3" symbol, "4" symbol, "5" symbol, "6" symbol, " There are "7" symbols, "8" symbols, and "9" symbols. The display modes of the fourth symbol 36Z include a first display mode, a second display mode, and a third display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, when the change display of the special symbol triggered by the start winning of the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15 starts, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are displayed. Each is "1" design-> "2" design-> "3" design-> "4" design-> "5" design-> "6" design-> "7" design-> "8" design-> "9" design-> "1" design The pattern "Z" starts the cycle display, and the fourth symbol 36Z starts the cycle display of the first display mode → the second display mode → the third display mode → the first display mode. When the special symbol stops after a fluctuation display for a predetermined fluctuation time T, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are determined in a combination corresponding to the stopped and displayed special symbol ( Complete stop).

  If the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are combined in a jackpot mode (hereinafter, referred to as "hit mode") in accordance with the stop of the special symbol. , A jackpot notification effect is stopped. If the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is lost, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are combined with each other in accordance with the stoppage of the special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "losing mode"). , A loss notification effect is stopped. The jackpot type reported by the combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z in the symbol variation effect always matches the jackpot type reported by the special symbol.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the relationship between the types of big hits and combinations of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z. In the gaming machine 1, when the 16R winning variation is won in the jackpot lottery, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are either "333" or "777" and the fourth symbol 36Z is in the third display mode. Stop at the combination of

  When the big hit lottery is won in 8R probability change, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", and " 999 ", the fourth symbol 36Z stops in the combination of the second display mode.

  In the case of winning at the jackpot lottery in 8R regular winning, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", and " 999 ", the fourth symbol 36Z stops in the combination of the first display mode.

  In the case of winning the 2R probability change in the jackpot lottery, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped in a combination of "135" and the fourth symbol 36Z in the first display mode.

  When the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z stop in a mode other than the above combination (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as a "losing mode").

  Here, the display size of the fourth symbol 36Z is extremely small as compared with the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R. For this reason, when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are determined (completely stopped) in the same symbol combination other than “777” and “333”, either the 8R probability change or the 8R normal hit is won. I do not know what it is. When the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are determined (completely stopped) at “777” or “333”, it is easily understood that at the time of the determination, the winning has been achieved per 16R probability change.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z stop in a hitting mode and perform a special game, a special game effect is performed in accordance with the special game. Do. In the special game effect, an opening effect relating to the opening of the special game, a round game effect relating to the round game, an ending effect relating to the ending of the special game, and the like are performed.

As shown in FIG. 7B, an image 37 (0) _{0 of the} fluctuation is displayed at the lower center in the image display device 31. When the change of the first special symbol is suspended, an image 37 ₁ of the first suspension (the first order in the variation order) of the first special symbol is displayed on the left side of the image 37 (0) of the variation on the image display device 31. (1) The image 37 ₁ (2) of the second hold (the change order is the second hold), the image 37 ₁ (3) of the third hold (the change order is the third hold), and the fourth hold (the change) Up to four images 37 ₁ (4) in the order (fourth hold) are displayed.

When the change of the second special symbol is suspended, the image of the first suspension (the first order in the variation order) of the second special symbol is displayed on the right side of the image 37 (0) of the variation on the image display device 31. 37 ₂ (1), second hold image ₃₇ 2 (2) of the (variation order is second hold), the third hold image ₃₇ 2 (3) of the (variation order is third hold), and a fourth hold Up to four images 37 ₂ (4) in the (fourth order of change) are displayed. Here, FIG. 7B shows only images 37 (0), 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), and 37 ₁ (3) for simplicity.

When the number of reserved displays on the first special symbol pending display 23 increases, the images 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) according to the retained number after the increase are displayed. Appear. When the number of reserved displays on the second special symbol reserve display 24 increases, the image 37 ₂ (1), 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ (3), or 37 ₂ (4) according to the retained number after the increase is displayed. Appear.

Image ₃₇ 1 ₍₁₎ corresponding to the hold display speed of the first special symbol reservation display 23, 37 1 (2), ₃₇ 1 (3), or ₃₇ 1 (4) display in the one of the special symbols Each time the change is completed, the image 37 (0) of the change disappears, the image 37 ₁ (1) of the first hold is moved to the position of the change image 37 (0) of the change, and the images after the second hold 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) move to the position to the right of each.

One image of the special symbol is displayed while the image 37 ₂ (1), 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ (3), or 37 ₂ (4) corresponding to the number of held displays on the second special symbol hold display 24 is displayed. Each time the change of the change is finished, the image 37 (0) of the change disappears, the image 37 ₂ (1) of the first reservation moves to the position of the fluctuation image 37 (0) of the change, and the images after the second reservation 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ (3), or 37 ₂ (4) move to the position to the left of each.

In the following description, the image _{37 (0)} 37 1 (1), ₃₇ 1 (2), 37 1 _(3), 37 1 (4), 37 _{2 (1),} 37 2 (2), ₃₇ 2 ( 3) and 37 ₂ (4) are appropriately referred to as “suspended display image 37”.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a mode of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 operates in five modes: a normal mode, a live mode, a special training mode, a setting change mode, and a setting confirmation mode. Among the five modes, the normal mode, the live mode, and the special training mode are modes related to the progress of the game. The normal mode, the live mode, and the special training mode can be shifted after the gaming machine 1 enters the customer waiting state after the initialization process when the normal start operation or the RAM clear start operation is performed. The setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are setting modes related to settings related to the jackpot. The setting change mode can be shifted only when the first special activation operation is performed. The setting confirmation mode can be shifted only when the second special activation operation is performed. The procedure of each activation operation will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the normal mode, the gaming machine 1 is in a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state, in the live mode, is in a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, and in the special training mode, is a low-probability gaming state. It becomes a state and a time saving game state.

  More specifically, when the normal start operation or the RAM clear start operation is performed, the gaming machine 1 enters the normal mode after the initialization process. The player starts the game in the normal mode. In the normal mode, a stage effect of three stages of a marine stage, a savannah stage, and a cosmo stage is performed in addition to the symbol change effect. In the stage effect of the savannah stage in the normal mode, an image showing the state of the sea is displayed as a background image of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the symbol variation effect. In the stage effect of the savannah stage in the normal mode, an image showing the state of the savanna is displayed as a background image of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the symbol variation effect. In the stage effect of the cosmo stage in the normal mode, an image showing the state of the universe is displayed as a background image of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the symbol variation effect. As shown in FIG. 10A, in the normal mode, there is a stage change at each predetermined timing (for example, immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display) in the fluctuation display sandwiching one or more fluctuation displays, In this stage change, the type of stage production is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), when a winning is won in a certain probability change, the effect after the end of the special game is an effect in the live mode. In the effect in the live mode, live recorded images are displayed as background images of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the symbol variation effect. The production of the live mode will continue until the jackpot is won again. Next, if the winning jackpot is a probability change hit, the production after the end of the special game will be the production of the live mode again. Next, if the winning jackpot is a normal hit, the effect after the end of the special game is the effect of the special training mode.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (b), when the normal winning is achieved, the effect after the end of the special game is the effect in the special training mode. In the production in the special training mode in which a winning is made on a regular basis, as a background image of the left design 36L, the middle design 36C, and the right design 36R in the design variation production, an animation image showing a state in which the character performs special training for a live is displayed. . In the lower right corner of the background image, the number of remaining special training modes is displayed. Each time the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are determined (completely stopped) in a losing manner, the remaining number is counted down from 100 → 99 → 98. When the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R stop in a lost mode in the symbol variation effect of the variation in which the remaining number of times is 1, an image of “end of special training mode” appears. The effect in which the image of “end of special training mode” appears is a special training mode end determination effect that notifies that the end of the time saving game state has been determined. The production after the special training mode finalization production is the production of the normal mode.

  The gaming machine 1, in the symbol fluctuation production, based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the operation of the production button 35, reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production, full rotation reach production, re-lottery production, challenge production, surprise operation One or more effects are selected from among a plurality of types of effects including effects, shortened fluctuation effects, and specific notice effects, and the selected one or more effects are displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive. The devices 33a, 33b, 33c and the lighting device for effect 34 are executed. In the special gaming effect, the gaming machine 1 selects and selects one or a plurality of effects from among a plurality of types of effects including a rank-up effect, based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the operation of the effect button 35. One or more effects are performed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device. The outline of each effect performed as a symbol variation effect or a special game effect is as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, a reach effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The reach effect may be executed after a normal variation (a variation in which the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are displayed in a loop) over a predetermined time within the variation time T of the special symbol. It is a period from time t _{RCA to} t _RCB . The reach demonstration, at time _{t RCA} in varying time T, one of the left symbol 36L and right symbol 36R (left symbol 36L in the example of FIG. 12 (a) and 12 see FIG. 12 (b)) is temporarily stopped. At the subsequent time t _RCB , the other of the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R (the right symbol 36R in the example of FIGS. 12A and 12B) is temporarily the same type of symbol as the one stopped earlier. Stop.

  In the reach effect, by temporarily stopping the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are in the reach mode (the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R are the same symbol while the middle symbol 36C is changed). (Temporary stop in combination). After the temporary stop in the reach mode of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the reach effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R hit each other as shown in FIG. 12 (b), the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are temporarily lost in a losing manner, as shown in FIG. 12 (b). In some cases, the process may proceed to a stop effect (hereinafter, referred to as “losing reach effect” as appropriate). Here, the losing reach effect of the present embodiment is an effect in which the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R advance to a temporary stop in the losing mode through a temporary stop in the reach mode, and the left symbol 36L, This is not an effect from the temporary stop of the middle symbol 36C and the right symbol 36R in the reach mode to the final stop (complete stop) in the loss mode.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (c), there is a case where an unannounced effect is executed as a part of the symbol change effect. The loss notice effect is that the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are missing before the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z stop in the loss mode. This is an effect that gives notice of stopping in an aspect. In the loss announcement effect, the characters "ha-sore-re" appear below the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, the SP reach effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The SP reach effect may be executed after the loss-reach effect is performed in a symbol change accompanied by the reach (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “reach change”). The SP reach effect is not executed in the symbol fluctuation (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “normal fluctuation”) that stops only with the normal fluctuation without establishing the reach. SP reach production is a development production that evolves from reach production. The SP reach effect is a resurrection effect indicating that the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R have revived from a state likely to be determined in the loss mode in the normal fluctuation. Before the start of the SP reach effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R temporarily stop in a losing manner. Thereafter, the middle symbol 36C of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R starts rotating at a high speed, and the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R move to the left and right corners of the screen. In the SP reach effect, an animation character image of a plurality of characters is displayed. The reliability of the jackpot when developing from the reach production to the SP reach production is higher than when not developing into the SP reach production.

  As shown in FIG. 13B, the SPSP reach effect may be executed as a part of the symbol change effect. The SPSP reach effect may be executed after the loss-reach effect in the reach variation. In the normal fluctuation, the SPSP reach effect is not executed. SPSP reach production is a development production that evolves from SP reach production. The SPSP reach effect is a resurrection effect indicating that in the SP reach effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R have been restored from a state in which they are likely to be determined in a loss mode. In the SP reach effect before the SPSP reach effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R temporarily stop in a losing manner. Thereafter, the middle symbol 36C of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R starts rotating at a high speed, and the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R move to the left and right corners of the screen. In the SPSP reach production, recorded images of singing by all characters are displayed. The reliability of the jackpot when developing from SP reach production to SPSP reach production is higher than when not developing into SPSP reach production.

  As shown in FIG. 13C, the SP specific notice effect may be executed in combination with the SP reach effect. In the SP specific notice effect, a stand on which SP characters are written and an image of the mini-character MC1 dancing on the stand appear in the lower right corner of the screen. The mini-character MC1 is a character that plays a role in suggesting a possibility of developing into SP reach production. Here, the SP reach effect is an effect that progresses from the temporary stop of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the loss mode in the normal variation, and therefore, the appearance of the mini-character MC1 is the left symbol in the normal variation. This is nothing but a notice that the 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R will temporarily stop in the losing mode.

  As shown in FIG. 13D, the SPSP specific notice effect may be executed together with the SPSP reach effect. In the SPSP specific notice effect, a stand on which SPSP characters are written and an image of the mini-character MC2 dancing on the stand appear in the lower right corner of the screen. The mini-character MC2 is a character that plays a role in suggesting the possibility of developing into SPSP reach production. Here, the SPSP reach effect is an effect that evolves from the temporary stop of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the loss mode in the SP reach effect. Therefore, the appearance of the mini-character MC2 is determined in the SP reach effect. This is nothing but a notice that the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R will temporarily stop in a losing manner.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the full-rotation reach effect may be executed as a part of the symbol fluctuation effect. The full rotation reach effect is an effect in which the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R fluctuate while being aligned in the same symbol combination. The full revolution reach effect may be executed at the end of the normal variation or the reach variation. The full rotation reach effect may be executed in the normal fluctuation and the reach fluctuation, or may be executed only in the reach fluctuation. The full-rotation reach effect is one of the jackpot-determining effects (an effect of notifying the effect before the effect symbol 36 is determined in the winning mode).

  As shown in FIGS. 15 (a), 15 (b), and 15 (c), a re-lottery effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The re-lottery effect may be executed when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are determined (completely stopped) in a manner of stopping per 16R, 8R, or 8R. This is the end of reach change. In the normal fluctuation, the re-lottery effect is not executed.

  Before the start of the re-lottery effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", and "999". ). In the re-lottery effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R start re-fluctuation after a temporary stop for a short time. The effect of this re-variation is a promotion effect for stating whether or not to be promoted from 8R probability change or 8R normal change to 16R probability change.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (a), when the winning has been achieved per 16R probability change, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R undergo re-variation, and when the special symbol is stopped, the left symbol 36L, The middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are in the stop mode per 16R probability change (the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R is "333" or "777", and the fourth symbol 36Z is the third display edge. ). The effect determined in the stop mode for the 16R certain change is a promotion confirmed effect that indicates that the promotion has been made from the 8R certain change or the 8R normal hit to the 16R certain change.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (b), when the winning is achieved in the 8R probability change, after the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are re-changed, when the special symbol is stopped, the left symbol 36L, The middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are determined in a stopping manner per 8R certain change.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (c), in the case of winning in the 8R regular winning, after the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are re-changed, when the special symbol is stopped, the left symbol 36L, The middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are determined in the stop mode of the normal 8R.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 (a), 16 (b), and 16 (c), a dialogue operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol change effect. The line operation effect may be executed from the beginning (before reach is established) to the end of normal fluctuation or reach fluctuation. In the line effect, a silhouette image and a balloon frame appearing in a repeating display of the silhouette of the character A → the silhouette of the character B → the silhouette of the character C → the silhouette of the character D → the silhouette of the character A are repeated. Slightly delayed from the appearance of the silhouette image and the balloon frame, an operation promotion effect prompting the operation of the effect button 35 (an image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image indicating the operation acceptance validity period, and an image of "press!" Production) is performed.

  When the effect button 35 is pressed within the operation reception validity period indicated by the indicator image, the looping of the silhouette is stopped, and the character A, B, C, or D appears, and words are displayed in the balloon frame. There are three types of dialogue appearing in the balloon frame: "...", "It's a chance", and "It's hot". The reliability of the jackpots for the three lines of production, "It's hot", "It's a chance", and "..." is "It's hot"> "It's a chance"> "..." It becomes high in order of. When "..." appears in the line operation effect, the change is fixed in a losing manner without developing. The dialogue announcement effect of "..." is one of the loss announcement effects for announcing that the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R stop in a loss mode.

  As shown in FIG. 16D, a dialogue operation specific notice effect may be executed together with the dialogue operation effect. The serif operation specific notice effect is an effect that suggests the possibility of executing the serif operation effect. In the serif operation specific notice effect, the serif (in the example of FIG. 16 (d), it is "very hot") that is the operation result of the serif operation effect is translucent behind the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R. A serif dejab image shown by appears.

  As shown in FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B, a challenge effect may be executed as a part of the symbol change effect. The challenge effect is executed after the loss-reach effect in the reach fluctuation is executed. If the 2R probability change (short hit) is won, the challenge production is a successful challenge production, and if it is lost, the challenge production is a challenge failure production.

  Before the start of the challenge effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R temporarily stop in a losing manner. After the temporary stop of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R, the screen darkens (blacks out), and after the darkening for a predetermined period, the second movable role 330b tilts. After that, the characters “Labyrinth Challenge”, the image of the castle, and the image of the guardian protecting the castle appear, and the display of the video in which the character travels through the labyrinth begins. After displaying the video for a predetermined period, an operation promoting effect prompting the operation of the effect button 35 (an effect imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image indicating the operation acceptance valid period, and an image of “press!” Appearing). Is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (a), when a 2R probability change (short hit) is won, the effect button 35 is pressed within the operation acceptance validity period indicated by the indicator image, or the effect button 35 is not operated. When the operation reception validity period elapses, a challenge revival effect is performed. In the challenge revival effect, the first movable auditorium 330a descends, and a challenge notification effect image (rose image) appears in the ring of the first movable auditorium 330a in the display screen of the image display device 31, and voice output is performed. The device 32 outputs a short hit notification effect sound (a sound of “queen”). After this effect, when the special symbol is stopped, the image of "my challenge succeeded!" Appears with the my character, and the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are stopped per 2R sure change. The mode (the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are determined to be "135").

  As shown in FIG. 17B, in the case of a loss, regardless of the operation of the effect button 35, the first movable role 330 a descends, the short hit notification effect image is displayed, and the short hit notification effect sound is generated. No output is done. In this case, when the special symbol is stopped, an image of “failure” appears, and the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are determined in a losing manner.

  As shown in FIG. 18A and FIG. 18B, a battle effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The battle effect is executed after execution of the losing reach effect in the reach fluctuation. If any one of the 16R probability change, the 8R probability change, and the 8R normal hit is won, the battle effect is a successful battle effect, and if it is lost, the battle failure effect is a failure failure effect.

  Before the start of the battle effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R temporarily stop in a losing manner. In the battle effect, an image of the my character on the left side, another character of the battle opponent on the right side, and an image of “VS” appear. Thereafter, the image of “Jan” and the image of “Ken” appear in order, and an image indicating the result of the first battle is displayed. Battle outcomes include "Aiko", "Win", and "Loss". If the result of the battle is “Aiko”, an image of “Jan” and an image of “Ken” appear in order, and an image indicating the result of the second battle is displayed. This display of “Aiko” → “Jan” → “Ken” → Battle result is repeated until the result becomes “Win” or “Loss”.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, when one of the 16R probability change, the 8R probability change, and the 8R normal change is won, the result of the “win” is obtained through one or more “aiko” s. The My Character image and the “Win” image are displayed. The effect in which the image of “My character” and “Win” appears is a battle success notification effect informing that the battle has been successful. When the image of “My Character” and “Win” appears, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z, when the special symbol is stopped, have a 16R probability change, an 8R probability change, or an 8R normal hit. (Complete stop).

  As shown in FIG. 18B, in the case of a loss, the result of “losing” is displayed through one or more “aiko”, and the image of the character of the battle partner and the image of “Lose” are displayed. Appear. The effect in which the character of the battle partner and the image of “Lose” appear is a battle failure notification effect that notifies that the battle has failed. When the image of "Lose" appears with the character of the battle opponent, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are fixed (complete stop) in a special pattern when the symbol is stopped. .

  As shown in FIG. 19A, a shortened fluctuation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol fluctuation effect. Here, the shortened fluctuation is a fluctuation display in which only the normal fluctuation is stopped without establishing the reach, and the fluctuation time is shorter than that of the normal fluctuation. The shortening fluctuation occurs with a predetermined probability when the number of reservations is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, two). In the shortened fluctuation effect, the sound output device 32 outputs a shortened fluctuation effect sound (a sound of “gash”) in accordance with the stop of the fluctuation.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (b), a shortened fluctuation announcement effect may be executed together with the shortened fluctuation effect. The shortened fluctuation announcement effect is an effect that gives notice that the fluctuation of the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 will be the shortened fluctuation before the symbols of the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 are stopped and displayed. In the shortened fluctuation announcement effect, an image of the cymbal that is the source of the sound of “Gashan” appears on the image 37 (0) of the fluctuation at the bottom of the screen.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (a), a surprise operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol change effect. The surprise operation effect may be performed after the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are temporarily stopped in the loss mode during the reach change, or the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, The right symbol 36R and the fourth symbol 36Z may be executed before the temporary stop in the losing mode. Further, the surprise operation effect may be executed during the normal fluctuation, or may be executed during the shortened fluctuation. The surprise operation effect is one of the relief effects for notifying that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  In the surprise operation effect, the effect button 35 is in a protruding state, and an operation promoting effect prompting the operation of the effect button 35 (an image simulating the effect button 35 in the protruding state, an indicator image indicating the operation acceptance valid period, and “press!”). Effect to make the image appear). If the effect button 35 is pressed within the operation reception valid period indicated by the indicator image, or if the operation reception valid period elapses without the operation of the production button 35, the first movable role 330a descends and the image display device 31 displays. A jackpot notification effect image (an image of an annular effect concentric with the ring of the first movable role 330a) appears in the ring of the first movable role 330a in the screen, and the jackpot notification sound is output from the audio output device 32. ("Squeaks") is output.

As shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, a rank-up effect may be executed as a part of a special game effect during a special game. In the rank-up effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are in the stop mode of "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", or "999". At the beginning of the execution of the special game in the special game that is played as a result of the decision, without specifying which of the 8R probability change or 8R regular win was won, which jackpot was won during the special game It is a production that clearly indicates. The rank-up effect is executed during a period from time t _{SKK to} time t _RDE after the start time t _S4R of the fourth round of the special game. In the rank-up effect, the player is urged to repeatedly hit the effect button 35, and when the number of hits of the effect button 35 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30 times), it is notified whether or not an 8R certain hit has occurred.

More specifically, in the rank-up effect, at time t _SKK , an image of “Charge the gauge and get a certain change” appears in the center of the screen. At time t _RDS , a horizontally long rectangular gauge image, an image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image indicating the progress of the operation reception validity period of the effect button 35, and an operation guide image (image of “continuous hit!”) Are displayed. Appear. In the gauge image, the left end of the extension range in the gauge image is MIN, the right end of the extension range of the gauge image is MAX, and the accuracy of the probability change is indicated by the extension amount between MIN and MAX.

In the rank-up effect, when the effect button 35 is repeatedly hit within the operation reception validity period indicated by the indicator image, the progress amount in the gauge image advances rightward in accordance with the continuous hit. If the number of repeated hits of the effect button 35 within the operation reception valid period reaches 30 or the end time t _RDE of the operation reception valid period without the number of continuous hits reaches 30, the rank is _{raised at} the end time t _RDE . Success or failure is reported.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (a), in the effect of rank up success, the amount of progress of the gauge reaches “MAX”, and images of “success” and “congratulations on change” are displayed. In a special game, when an effect of success in rank up is executed, an effect in the live mode (FIG. 11A) is performed after the end of the special game.

  As shown in FIG. 21B, in the effect of rank-up failure, the progress amount of the gauge stops before “MAX”, and an image of “failure” is displayed. In the special game, when an effect of rank-up failure is executed, an effect of the special training mode (FIG. 11B) is performed after the end of the special game.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 (b), 10 (c), and 10 (d), a stage change announcement effect may be executed before a stage change in the fluctuation display of the normal mode. As shown in FIG. 10 (b), in the stage change announcement effect for announcing the stage change to the savannah stage, a mini-character related to the savannah stage (a mini-character of an elephant in the example of FIG. 10 (b)) appears. As shown in FIG. 10 (c), in the stage change announcement effect for announcing the stage change to the cosmo stage, a mini-character related to the cosmo stage (a rocket mini-character in the example of FIG. 10 (c)) appears. As shown in FIG. 10 (d), in the stage change announcement effect for announcing the stage change to the marine stage, a mini-character related to the marine stage (a dolphin mini-character in the example of FIG. 10 (d)) appears. The stage change announcement effect may be performed immediately before the stop of the special symbol change display as shown in FIG. 10A, or immediately after the stop of the special symbol change display as shown in FIG. 10B. It may be performed, or as shown in FIG. 10B, immediately after the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

  Further, the gaming machine 1 may execute a look-ahead effect effect when suspension of the change of the special symbol occurs due to the start winning of the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15. The look-ahead effect effect is an effect indicating that there is a possibility of a jackpot in the reservation due to the appearance of the effect image.

As shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b), a change in the special symbol is suspended due to the start winning, and the suspension (in the example of FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b)), the start winning is achieved. When a look-ahead effect effect in which a change corresponding to the generated first special symbol (fourth hold) is the final change is executed, each of the normal change or the shortened change from the start winning to the change before the final change is performed. The time t _EF immediately after the start (in the example of FIGS. 22A and 22B, the time t _EF (3) immediately after the start of the change three times before the final change, the time t _EF (3) immediately after the start of the change At a time t _EF (2) immediately after the start and a time t _EF (1) immediately after the start of the change immediately before the final change, an effect image (an image imitating lightning) appears behind the effect design 36, A pre-reading effect sound is output from the audio output device 32. In the look-ahead effect effect, the reliability of the jackpot of the final variation increases in the order of blue effect <green effect <red effect. The effect image and the look-ahead effect sound are different between the normal fluctuation and the shortened fluctuation. In the normal fluctuation, one lightning appears behind the middle symbol 36C, and a sound “picka” is output. In the shortening variation, two lightning bolts appear behind the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R, and a sound “sparkling” is output.

  Here, the look-ahead effect effect is an effect that suggests the possibility that the final fluctuation will be a big hit, so the appearance of lightning immediately after the start of the fluctuation display in the normal fluctuation or the shortened fluctuation before the final fluctuation is lost. It is nothing but a notice of stopping and displaying with the pattern of. Also, while the look-ahead production sound in normal fluctuation is `` pikaka '', the look-ahead production sound in normal fluctuation is `` shiny '', so the output of the sound `` shiny '' immediately after the start of the fluctuation display in shortened fluctuation is It is nothing but a notice that the fluctuation will be a shortened fluctuation.

  As shown in FIG. 2, on the back of the gaming machine 1, a main control board 110, an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power board 170, a game information output terminal board 30, a power plug 171 and a power switch 172 are provided. is there. The main control board 110 is covered with a removable cover 119. FIG. 23 is an assembly diagram showing the cover 119 of the main control board 110 and the inside configuration thereof. Inside the cover 119, there are a RAM clear switch 174, a setting key 177, and a monitor 178.

  The RAM clear switch 174 is turned from the OFF state to the ON state by being pushed backward by a finger. The setting key 177 is switched between an OFF state and an ON state by inserting the key 176 into the key hole of the setting key 177 and turning the key. The monitor 178 is composed of 4-digit 8-segment LEDs (seven LEDs forming a number and one LED forming a decimal point). Inside the lower left corner of the cover 119, a hole 173 is formed. Even when the cover 119 is mounted on the main control board 110, the RAM clear switch 174 inside the hole 173 can be pressed to be turned on. When the cover 119 is attached to the main control board 110, the setting key 177 cannot be operated, but the monitor 178 is visible.

  When a start operation is performed on the gaming machine 1, power is supplied from the power supply board 170 to the main control board 110, the effect control board 120, and the payout control board 130, and the boards 110, 120, and 130 are started. The main control board 110, the effect control board 120, and the payout control board 130 can operate independently when the power is turned on.

  Here, the starting operation of the gaming machine 1 includes a normal starting operation, a RAM clear starting operation, a first special starting operation, and a second special starting operation. As shown in FIG. 24, in the normal startup operation, the setting key 177 is turned off, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned off, and the power switch 172 is turned on. When a normal start operation is performed, the gaming machine 1 restores data in a used area of the main RAM 110c in an initialization process, and performs a normal mode process after the initialization process is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the RAM clear activation operation, the setting key 177 is turned off, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned on, and the power switch 172 is turned on. When the RAM clear activation operation is performed, the gaming machine 1 clears the used area of the main RAM 110c in the initialization processing, and performs the normal mode processing after the initialization processing is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 26A, in the first special activation operation, the setting key 177 is turned on, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned on, and the power switch 172 is turned on. The first special activation operation must be performed with the glass door 50 opened. When the first special activation operation is performed, the gaming machine 1 performs a setting change mode process in the initialization process. In the setting change mode, a number indicating the current setting of the jackpot lottery probability (“0001” indicating setting 1 in the example of FIG. 26A) is displayed on the monitor 178 of the main control board 110. In the setting change mode, a change operation of the setting of the jackpot lottery probability can be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (B), when it is desired to change the setting of the jackpot lottery probability, the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed. Every time the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed once, the number of monitors 178 changes cyclically as "0002" → "0003" → "0004" → "0005" → "0006" → "0001". If it is desired to confirm the setting of the jackpot lottery probability, the setting key 177 is returned to the OFF state, and the power switch 172 is turned off. When the power switch 172 is turned off, the setting corresponding to the number of monitors 178 at that time (setting 2 corresponding to “0002” in the example of FIG. 26B) is determined as a new setting, and this setting is set. The information is written into the setting information storage area of the main RAM 110c, and after this writing, a process related to power-off is executed. Thereafter, when the normal startup operation (FIG. 24) is performed again, the setting information of the main RAM 110c is restored in the initialization processing. After going into the customer waiting state after the initialization process, the jackpot lottery is performed under the jackpot lottery probability indicated by the setting information.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in the second special activation operation, the setting key 177 is turned on, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned off, and the power switch 172 is turned on. The second special activation operation must be performed with the glass door 50 opened. When the second special start-up operation is performed, the gaming machine 1 performs a setting confirmation mode process in the initialization process. In the setting confirmation mode, a number (“0002” indicating setting 2 in the example of FIG. 27) indicating the current setting of the jackpot lottery probability is displayed on the monitor 178 of the main control board 110.

  In FIG. 3, a main control board 110 controls a basic operation of the gaming machine 1. The main control board 110 includes a one-chip microcomputer 110m, an input port (not shown), and an output port (not shown). The one-chip microcomputer 110m of the main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a, a main ROM 110b, and a main RAM 110c.

  The input ports of the main control board 110 include a payout control board 130, a general winning opening detecting switch 12a, a gate detecting switch 13a, a first starting opening detecting switch 14a, a second starting opening detecting switch 15a, and a first winning opening detecting switch. 16a, a second winning opening detection switch 17a, a door opening switch 18a, a magnetic detection sensor 18b, and a vibration detection sensor 18c are connected.

  The output ports of the main control board 110 include a payout control board 130, a starting opening / closing solenoid 15c, a first winning opening / closing solenoid 16c, a second winning opening / closing solenoid 17c, a first special symbol display device 20, and a second special The symbol display device 21, the ordinary symbol display device 22, the first special symbol reservation display 23, the second special symbol reservation display 24, the ordinary symbol reservation display 25, and the game information output terminal board 30 are connected. The game information output terminal board 30 is for outputting an external output signal generated in the main control board 110 to a hall computer or the like of a game store. The game information output terminal plate 30 is provided with a connector for connecting to a hall computer or the like of a game store.

  The main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 reads out a program stored in the main ROM 110b based on an input signal from each detection switch and a timer, and performs arithmetic processing. In addition, the main CPU 110a directly controls the display devices 20 to 22 and the display devices 23 to 25, and transmits a command to another board according to the result of the arithmetic processing. When the start operation is performed, the main CPU 110a executes an initialization process, and after the initialization process is completed and a game is ready to be played, a jackpot random number value, a special symbol random value, a reach determination random value, While updating various random numbers including a special figure variation random number, a normal symbol random number, and the like within the respective random number ranges, the control of a special symbol fluctuation, a normal symbol fluctuation, and the progress of a game such as a special game is controlled.

  The main ROM 110b of the main control board 110 stores data such as a game control program. The main ROM 110b has a jackpot determination table for the special symbol display devices 20 and 21, a hit determination table for the ordinary symbol display device 22, a symbol determination table, a variation pattern determination table, a preliminary determination table, a special game control table, a special winning opening. Various tables such as an open / close control table and a special game end setting table are stored. Details of these tables will be described later.

  The main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 110a. In the main RAM 110c, a special symbol hold storage area, a special figure special power processing data storage area, a stop symbol data storage area, a normal symbol hold storage area, a normal symbol normal power process data storage area, a normal symbol data storage area, a number of rounds (R ) Storage area, large winning opening ball entry number (C) storage area, high-probability game flag storage area, time saving game flag storage area, game state buffer, first special symbol reserved number counter, second special symbol reserved number counter, ordinary Various types such as symbol holding number counter, high probability game number (X) counter, time saving number (J) counter, special symbol time counter, special game timer counter, ordinary symbol time counter, auxiliary game timer counter, transmission data storage area for effects, etc. A storage area is provided. Here, at the time of power failure, the data in the used area of the main RAM 110c is backed up by a backup power supply after adding a checksum, and at the time of power restoration, the data backed up by the backup power supply is restored through a data check by the checksum. I am getting it.

  The power supply board 170 supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine 1 and supplies a power cutoff detection signal indicating whether or not the power supply voltage has become a predetermined value or less to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120. The power supply board 170 has a backup power supply composed of a capacitor. The power supply board 170 sets the disconnection detection signal to a high level while the power supply voltage is higher than a predetermined value, and sets the disconnection detection signal to a low level when the power supply voltage becomes lower than the predetermined value.

  The effect control board 120 controls various effects. The effect control board 120 receives the command generated by the main control board 110, and based on the received command, an image display executed in the image display device 31, a sound output executed in the audio output device 32, a drive for effect. The operation performed in the devices 33a, 33b, and 33c, or the blink performed in the lighting device for staging 34 is controlled. Describing in more detail, the effect control board 120 is connected to the main control board 110 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120. The effect control board 120 includes a sub CPU 120a, a sub ROM 120b, a sub RAM 120c, and an RTC 120d. The RTC 120d outputs a time signal indicating the current date and time to the sub CPU 120a. The RTC 120d operates with the supplied power when the gaming machine 1 is supplied with power, and operates with the power of the backup power supply mounted on the power supply board 170 when the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

  The sub CPU 120a reads out a program stored in the sub ROM 120b based on a command transmitted from the main control board 110 and an input signal from the timer, performs an arithmetic process, and, based on the process, outputs a corresponding command to a ramp. The data is transmitted to the control board 140 and the image control board 150. When the start operation is performed, the sub CPU 120a performs initialization processing, and after the initialization processing is completed and the game is ready to be played, the effect random number values 1 to 21 (each having a random number range of 0 to 99). While updating various random number values including each of the 21 random number values having the same in the respective random number ranges, the effect according to the progress of the game is controlled. Here, the effect random number values 1 to 21 are configured such that the same random number value is not obtained at the same time.

  The sub-ROM 120b of the effect control board 120 stores data such as effect control programs. Various tables such as a fluctuation effect pattern determination table are stored in the sub ROM 120b. Details of these tables will be described later. The sub RAM 120c of the effect control board 120 functions as a work area for data during the arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 120a. The sub RAM 120c is provided with various storage areas such as an effect information storage area, an effect symbol storage area, a symbol fluctuation effect pattern storage area, a game state storage area, and an effect pattern storage area.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing main commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120. The command transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 is composed of a total of 2 bytes of 1-byte MODE data indicating the type of command and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content of the command.

  "Symbol designating command", "Symbol designating command per first probable variable length", "Symbol designating command per first probable variable development" and the like, "designation command" is the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display This is a command for designating a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the device 21.

  The "first special symbol reservation number designation command" such as the "first special symbol reservation number 0 designation command" or the "first special symbol reservation number 1 designation command" is a command that indicates the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol. is there. "Second special symbol reservation number designation command" such as "second special symbol reservation number 0 designation command" and "second special symbol retention number 1 designation command" are commands indicating the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol. is there. In the following description, the “first special symbol reservation number designation command” and the “second special symbol reservation number designation command” are collectively referred to as “special symbol reservation number designation command” as appropriate.

  The “fluctuation stop command” is a command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed.

  The “power-on designation command” is a command indicating that the main control board 110 has been powered on. The “RAM clear designation command” is a command indicating that the information in the main RAM 110c has been cleared. The "power restoration 1 designation command", the "power restoration 2 designation command", the "power restoration 3 designation command", and the "power restoration 4 designation command" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "power restoration designation command" as appropriate) Is a command indicating that the power of the main control board 110 has been turned on again. The “power restoration 1 designation command” indicates that the gaming state at the time of power restoration is “low probability gaming state and non-time saving gaming state”. The “power supply restoration 2 designation command” indicates that the game state at the time of power restoration is “low probability game state and time reduction game state”. The “power supply restoration 3 designation command” indicates that the game state at the time of power supply restoration is “high-probability game state and non-time saving game state”. The “power restoration 4 designation command” indicates that the gaming state at the time of power restoration is “high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state”.

  The “customer wait designation command” is a command indicating that the customer has entered the wait state.

  The “first special symbol change start command” such as the “first special symbol change start 1 change start command” and the “first special symbol change start 2 change start command” is the first special symbol display device 20. 1 This is a command to start changing the special symbol. The “second special symbol change start command” such as the “second special symbol change start 11 change start command” and the “second special symbol change start 12 change start command” is the second special symbol display device 21. 2 This is a command to start changing the special symbol. In the following description, the "variation start command for the first special symbol" and the "variation start command for the second special symbol" are collectively referred to as a "variation start command" as appropriate.

  The “first special symbol start winning designation command” such as the “first special symbol start winning 1 designation command”, the “first special symbol start winning 2 designation command”, etc. This is a command that indicates that a game ball has been awarded to one starting port 14). "Start special winning start command for second special symbol 11", "Start special winning start command for second special symbol 12", "Start special winning start command for second special symbol", etc. 2) is a command indicating that a game ball has been won to the starting port 15). In the following description, the "first special symbol start winning designation command" and the "second special symbol start winning designation command" are collectively referred to as "start winning designation command" as appropriate.

  The "round start command" such as the "round opening command for the first opening per long", the "round starting command for the second opening per long", the "round starting command for the first opening per short", and the like are used for each round of the special game. It is a command to indicate that it is starting. An "opening designation command" such as a "variable length opening designation command" or a "normal length opening designation command" is a special game start command indicating that a special game has been started. The “ending designation command” is a special game end command indicating that the special game is to be ended.

  The "game state 1 designation command", "game state 2 designation command", "game state 3 designation command", and "game state 4 designation command" are commands indicating the game state of the gaming machine 1. The “game state 1 designation command” indicates that the game state is the low probability game state and the non-time saving game state. The “game state 2 designation command” indicates that the game state is the high probability game state and the non-time saving game state. The “game state 3 designation command” indicates that the game state is the low probability game state and the time saving game state. The “game state 4 designation command” indicates a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state.

  The “dish full error command” is a command indicating that a full fill error has occurred. The tray full error occurs when the payout control board 130 outputs a command indicating that the tray 40 is full. The “counter case error command” is a command indicating that a counter case error has occurred. The counter case error occurs when ball clogging between the tray 40 and the dispensing mechanism is detected. The “counter switch disconnection error command” is a command indicating that a count switch disconnection error has occurred. The counting switch disconnection error occurs when it is detected that the wiring between the dispensing control board 130 and the dispensing device relay terminal plate or the wiring between the dispensing device relay terminal plate and the dispensing mechanism is cut.

  The “ballless error command” is a command indicating that a ballless error has occurred. The ball-out error occurs when the payout control board 130 outputs a command indicating that there is no game ball in the payout device. The “excessive payout error command” is a command indicating that an excessive payout error command has occurred. The overpayment error occurs when it is detected that the payout is overpayment (the payout apparatus has paid out more than the requested number). The “payout command error command” is a command indicating that a payout command error has occurred. The payout command error occurs when it is detected that the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 to the payout control board 130 is abnormal.

  The “door opening error command” is a command indicating that a door opening error has occurred. The door opening error occurs when the door opening switch 18a detects the opening of the glass door 50. The “switch non-connection error command” is a command indicating that a switch non-connection error has occurred. The switch non-connection error is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 12a, the gate detection switch 13a, the first starting opening detecting switch 14a, the second starting opening detecting switch 15a, the first winning opening detecting switch 16a, and the second winning opening detecting. Occurs when disconnection or poor connection in any of the switches 17a is detected.

  The “abnormal winning error command” is a command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred. The abnormal winning prize error is detected when the starting prize of the second starting port 15 is detected by the second starting port detecting switch 15a after elapse of 1.200 seconds from the time when the movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15 is closed. When the movable piece 17b of the second special winning opening 17 is not operated, when the winning in the second special winning opening 17 is detected by the second special winning opening detection switch 17a, or when the first large winning opening 16 is Occurs when the first winning opening 16 is detected by the first winning opening detection switch 16a when the first winning opening opening / closing door 16b is not operated.

  The “discharge error command” is a command indicating that a discharge error has occurred. The discharge error is determined by the number of game balls passing through the switches 12a, 14a, 15a, 16a, 17a of the winning ports 12, 14, 15, 16, 17 and the number of ball balls passing through a frame count switch (not shown). Is generated when the error of exceeds a predetermined number.

  The “magnet detection error command” and the “vibration detection error command” are fraudulent commands indicating that fraud has occurred. The magnet detection error occurs when the magnetism detection sensor 18b detects magnetism. The vibration detection error occurs when the vibration detection sensor 18c detects the vibration of the gaming machine 1.

  The “full-tank error elimination command” is a command indicating that the full-tank error has been eliminated. The “counter case error elimination command” is a command indicating that the counter case error has been eliminated. The “count switch disconnection error elimination command” is a command indicating that the count switch disconnection error has been eliminated. The “ballless error resolution command” is a command indicating that the ballless error resolution command has been resolved. The “excessive payout error elimination command” is a command indicating that the excessive payout error has been resolved. The “payout command error elimination command” is a command indicating that the dispense command error has been resolved. The “door opening error elimination command” is a command indicating that the door opening error has been eliminated. The “switch unconnection error elimination command” is a command indicating that the switch unconnection error has been eliminated. The “abnormal winning error elimination command” is a command indicating that the abnormal winning error has been resolved. The “discharge error elimination command” is a command indicating that the discharge error has been eliminated. The “magnet detection error elimination command” is a command indicating that the magnet detection error has been eliminated. The “vibration detection error elimination command” is a command indicating that the vibration detection error has been eliminated.

  Here, among the above commands, a symbol designating command, a special symbol holding number designating command, a variation stop command, a customer waiting designation command, a variation start command, a start winning designation command, a round start command, an opening designation command, an ending designation command, The game state designation command is a command related to the progress of the game on the main control board 110. In the following description, these commands will be appropriately referred to as “game commands”.

  Power-on specification command, RAM clear specification command, power restoration specification command, full tank error command, counter case error command, counting switch disconnection error command, no ball error command, excess dispensing error command, dispensing command error command, door open error Command, Switch not connected error command, Abnormal winning error command, Ejection error command, Magnet detection error command, Vibration detection error command, Full tank error clear command, Counter case error clear command, Count switch disconnection error clear command, Ball clear error clear Command, payout excess error clearing command, payout command error clearing command, door open error clearing command, switch unconnected error clearing command, abnormal winning error clearing command, discharge error clearing command Command, the magnet detection error eliminating command, and a vibration detection error eliminating command is a game progress unrelated special commands in the main control board 110. In the following description, these commands will be appropriately referred to as “special commands”.

  In FIG. 3, a payout control board 130 controls payout of game balls. The payout control board 130 is connected to the main control board 110 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. The payout control board 130 includes a one-chip microcomputer including a payout CPU, a payout ROM, and a payout RAM (not shown). The payout CPU reads out the program stored in the payout ROM based on the input signals from the payout ball counting switch 132 and the timer, performs an arithmetic process, and sends a corresponding command to the main control board 110 based on the process. Send. An output side of the payout control board 130 is connected to a payout motor 131 of a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from a storage section of the game balls. The payout CPU reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM based on a command transmitted from the main control board 110 to perform arithmetic processing, and controls the payout motor 131 of the payout device to pay out predetermined game balls. At this time, the payout RAM functions as a work area for data during calculation processing of the payout CPU.

  The lamp control board 140 controls the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c and the effect lighting device. The lamp control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device. The lamp control board 140 controls energization of drive sources such as solenoids and motors for operating the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c based on various commands transmitted from the effect control board 120, and controls the light in the effect lighting device 34. , And drive control of a motor for changing the light irradiation direction.

  The image control board 150 controls the image display device 31 and the audio output device 32. The image control board 150 is connected to the effect control board 120 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. The image control board 150 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a VDP, and a sound DSP (not shown). The CPU of the image control board 150 executes a program stored in the ROM while using the RAM as a work area. When a command is transmitted from the effect control board 120, the CPU generates a control signal according to the content of the command and outputs the control signal to the VDP and the audio DSP, thereby controlling the operations of the VDP and the audio DSP.

  The VDP of the image control board 150 includes an image ROM for storing material data necessary for generating an image, a drawing engine for executing image drawing processing, and an output for outputting an image drawn by the drawing engine to the image display device 31. Circuit. The drawing engine draws an image in a frame buffer using material data stored in the image ROM based on a control signal from the CPU. The output circuit outputs the image drawn in the frame buffer to the image display device 31 at a predetermined timing.

  The sound DSP of the image control board 150 is connected to a sound ROM for storing various sound data related to music, sound, sound effects, and the like, and an SDRAM used as a work area for data processing by the sound DSP. The sound DSP reads sound data corresponding to a control signal from the CPU from the sound ROM to the SDRAM, executes data processing, and amplifies a sound signal obtained by the data processing with a gain corresponding to the control signal from the CPU. Then, the amplified sound signal is output to the sound output device 32.

Next, an operation of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a main process of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1. In the main processing, power is supplied from the power supply board 170 to the main control board 110 by a start-up operation (normal start-up operation, RAM clear start-up operation, first special start-up operation, or second special start-up operation). The process is started when a system reset occurs in the CPU 110a.

  In FIG. 29, the main CPU 110a performs an initialization process (S10). In the initialization process, the main CPU 110a reads and executes a game control program from the main ROM 110b in response to power-on. Details of the initialization process will be described later.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs a power-off monitoring process (S20). In the power-off monitoring process, the main CPU 110a monitors whether or not the power-off of the gaming machine 1 has occurred, and when the power-off has occurred, the firing mechanism (the touch sensor 3a, the firing volume 3b, the firing solenoid 4a, And stopping the firing of the game ball by the ball feed solenoid 4b), clearing the output port, stopping the payout of the game ball by the payout device, creating and storing the checksum in each storage area of the main RAM 110c, and information on the occurrence of power interruption. After performing a series of the processing of setting, the access to the main RAM 110c is set to be prohibited to prepare for power-off. The details of the power-off monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs a game random value update process (S30). In the game random value update process, the main CPU 110a updates the reach determination random value and the special figure change random value. Next, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random value update process (S40). In the initial random value updating process, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot initial random value, the ordinary symbol initial random value, and the special symbol initial random value.

  Thereafter, the main CPU 110a repeats the loop processing of steps S20 to S40. In addition to this loop processing, the main CPU 110a executes a timer interrupt process each time a reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit. Details of this timer interrupt processing will be described later.

  FIGS. 30 and 31 are flowcharts showing details of the initialization processing (S10) of FIG. In FIG. 31, after performing a security check on the main CPU 110a, the main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 performs a process of waiting for 2000 ms (S10-1).

  Next, the main CPU 110a permits access to the main RAM 110c (S10-2). Next, the main CPU 110a sets a serial communication port (S10-3). Next, the main CPU 110a sets a watchdog timer (S10-4). Here, the watchdog timer monitors whether the one-chip microcomputer 110m of the main control board 110 is operating normally in accordance with the game control program. When the game control program being executed is interrupted or stopped due to an abnormality in the game control program, or only the loop process is repeatedly executed so that other game processes are not executed after the execution of the program is interrupted, When the timer count unit of the watchdog timer counts up during the stop state or the standby state by the loop processing, the one-chip microcomputer 110m of the main control board 110 is forcibly initialized.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs an error determination process (S10-5). In the error determination process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an error has occurred, and transmits an error command of the occurred error to the effect control board 120 when determining that an error has occurred. Here, the reason for determining an error in the initialization processing is as follows. Some errors are difficult to resolve while the gaming machine 1 is operating. When such an error has occurred at the time of starting the gaming machine 1, it is preferable to notify the occurrence of the error before the gaming machine 1 completes the initialization process and shifts to the customer waiting state. For the above reasons, the gaming machine 1 determines an error in the initialization processing.

  Next, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command to the effect control board 120 (S10-6). After that, the main CPU 110a outputs a firing permission signal to the firing control board 160, so that the game ball is fired by the firing mechanism (the firing mechanism including the touch sensor 3a, the firing volume 3b, the firing solenoid 4a, and the ball feed solenoid 4b). The launch is set (S10-7).

  Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting key 177 is in the ON state (S10-8). When the setting key 177 is in the ON state (S10-8: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-9. If the setting key 177 is in the OFF state (S10-8: No), the process proceeds to step S10-11 in FIG.

  In step S10-9, it is determined whether the glass door 50 is open. If the glass door 50 is open (S10-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-10. If the glass door 50 is closed (S10-9: No), the process proceeds to step S10-11.

  In step S10-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 174 has been pressed. If the first special startup operation (FIG. 26A) is performed, the determination result of this step is “No”, and if the second special startup operation (FIG. 27) is performed, the determination result of this step is “No”. Yes ". When the RAM clear switch 174 has not been pressed (S10-10: No), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-30. If the RAM clear switch 174 has been pressed (S10-10: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-40.

  In step S10-30, the main CPU 110a performs a setting change mode process. In the setting change mode processing, the main CPU 110a performs processing relating to display on the monitor 178 and updating of the setting information of the jackpot lottery probability in the main RAM 110c. In the setting confirmation mode processing, processing related to display on the monitor 178 is performed. The details of the setting change mode process and the setting confirmation mode process will be described later.

  In step S10-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the RAM clear switch 174 has been pressed. If the RAM clear activation operation (FIG. 25) is performed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”, and if the normal startup operation (FIG. 24) is performed, the determination result of this step is “No”. When the RAM clear switch 174 has been pressed (S10-11: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-17. If the RAM clear switch 174 has not been pressed (S10-11: No), the process proceeds to step S10-12.

  In step S10-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether the power-off occurrence information is normal. When the power-off occurrence information is not normal (S10-12: No), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-17. If the power-off occurrence information is normal (S10-12: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-13.

  In step S10-13, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum of the data in the used area of the main RAM 110c, and proceeds to the next step S10-14. In step S10-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. More specifically, the main CPU 110a calculates from the checksum calculated in step S10-13 and the data in the used area of the main RAM 110c at that time in the power-off monitoring process (S20) at the time of the previous power failure. The checksums stored in the main RAM 110c are compared with each other, and if they match, it is determined that the checksum is normal (backup is valid and data can be recovered). If they do not match, the checksum is not normal (backup). Is not valid and data recovery is not possible). When the checksum is not normal (S10-14: No), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-17. If the checksum is normal (S10-14: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-15.

  In step S10-15, the main CPU 110a sets the main RAM 110c when the backup is valid. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10-16. In step S10-16, the main CPU 110a transmits one of the power restoration 1 designation command, the power restoration 2 designation command, the power restoration 3 designation command, and the power restoration 4 designation command to the effect control board 120. More specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-short game flag storage area of the main RAM 110c, and determines that the high-probability game flag is not set and the time-short game flag is not set (the previous time). When the gaming state at the time of the power failure is the low probability gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state), the power supply restoration 1 designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120. When the high-probability game flag is not set and the time-saving game flag is set (when the previous game state at the time of power failure is the low-probability game state and the time-saving game state), the power restoration 2 designation command Is transmitted to the effect control board 120. When the high-probability game flag is set and the time-saving game flag is not set (when the previous game state at the time of the power failure is the high-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state), the power restoration 3 designation command Is transmitted to the effect control board 120. When the high-probability game flag is set and the time-saving game flag is set (when the previous game state at the time of the power failure is the high-probability game state and the short game state), the power restoration 4 designation command is issued. It is transmitted to effect control board 120. After execution of step S10-16, the present initialization processing ends.

  In step S10-17, the main CPU 110a clears the used area of the main RAM 110c. By clearing the used area, predetermined data in the used area (for example, various random numbers and flags backed up at the time of the previous power failure) are initialized.

  After execution of step S10-17, the main CPU 110a sets the main RAM 110c when the backup is not valid (S10-18). Thereafter, the main CPU 110a clears the watchdog timer (S10-19). Thereafter, the main CPU 110a transmits a RAM clear designation command to the effect control board 120 (S10-20). After execution of step S10-20, the present initialization processing ends.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing details of the setting change mode process (step S10-30 in FIG. 30). In FIG. 32, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting change command to the effect control board 120 (S10-31). The setting change command is a command indicating that the mode has changed to the setting change mode. Next, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting information in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 110c and causes the monitor 178 to display a number indicating the current setting of the jackpot lottery probability (S10-32). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10-33.

  In step S10-33, the main CPU 110a determines whether the power of the gaming machine 1 has been cut off. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that the power has been cut off when a power cut-off detection signal indicating that the power supply voltage has fallen below a predetermined value is input from a power supply unit (not shown) of the power supply board 170. If no power failure detection signal is input, it is determined that power has not been lost. If the operation of turning off the power switch 174 (FIG. 26B) is performed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the main CPU 110a determines that the power has not been cut off (S10-33: No), the process proceeds to step S10-34. When it is determined that the power interruption has occurred (S10-33: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-37.

  In step S10-34, the main CPU 110a determines whether the RAM clear switch 174 has been pressed. If the operation of pressing the RAM clear switch 174 (FIG. 26B) is performed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the RAM clear switch 174 has been pressed (S10-34: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-35. If the RAM clear switch 174 has not been pressed (S10-34: No), the process proceeds to step S10-33.

  In step S10-35, the main CPU 110a rewrites the setting information in the setting information storage area in the main RAM 110c to the setting of the next stage. Next, the main CPU 110a changes the number of monitors 178 to a number corresponding to the setting information after rewriting (S10-36). Thereafter, the process returns to step S10-33, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  In step S10-37, the main CPU 110a creates a checksum of the data in the storage area of the main RAM 110c, and stores the created checksum in the main RAM 110c. Here, the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c in step S10-37 is compared with the checksum calculated from the data in the used area of the main RAM 110c at the time of the initialization processing at the next power-on (FIG. In step S10-14), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (whether the backup is valid and data recovery is possible) based on whether or not the two match.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets power-off occurrence information (S10-38). Thereafter, the main CPU 110a sets access to the main RAM 110c to prohibition (S10-39). After executing steps S10-39, the main CPU 110a performs an infinite loop to prepare for power-off.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing details of the setting confirmation mode process (step S10-40 in FIG. 30). In FIG. 33, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation command to the effect control board 120 (S10-41). The setting confirmation command is a command indicating that the mode has been changed to the setting confirmation mode. Next, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting information in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 110c and causes the monitor 178 to display a number indicating the current setting of the jackpot lottery probability (S10-42). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10-43.

  In step S10-43, the main CPU 110a determines whether the power of the gaming machine 1 has been cut off. When the main CPU 110a determines that the power has been cut off (S10-43: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-47.

  In step S10-47, the main CPU 110a creates a checksum of the data in the storage area of the main RAM 110c, and stores the created checksum in the main RAM 110c. Here, the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c in step S10-47 is compared with the checksum calculated from the data in the used area of the main RAM 110c at the time of the initialization processing at the next power-on (FIG. In step S10-14), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (whether the backup is valid and data recovery is possible) based on whether or not the two match.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets the power-off occurrence information (S10-48). Thereafter, the main CPU 110a sets access to the main RAM 110c to be prohibited (S10-49). After executing Steps S10-49, the main CPU 110a performs an infinite loop to prepare for power-off.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing details of the power-off monitoring process (step S20 in FIG. 29). In FIG. 34, the main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 sets interrupt prohibition (S20-1). Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the power of the gaming machine 1 has been cut off (S20-2). When the main CPU 110a determines that the power has not been cut off (S20-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S20-3. When it is determined that the power interruption has occurred (S20-2: No), the process proceeds to step S20-4.

  In step S20-3, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt permission. After executing step S20-3, the main CPU 110a ends the current power-off monitoring process.

  In step S20-4, the main CPU 110a outputs a firing stop signal to the firing control board 160 to stop firing of the game ball by the firing mechanism. Next, the main CPU 110a clears the output port (S20-5). Thereafter, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-off designation command to the payout control board 130 (S20-6). Upon receiving the power-off designation command, the payout control board 130 returns a command related to output of external information. The main CPU 110a receives the command related to the output of the external information, and stores the command in the main RAM 110c (S20-7).

  After the execution of step S20-7, the main CPU 110a creates a checksum of the data in the storage area of the main RAM 110c, and stores the created checksum in the main RAM 110c (S20-8). Here, the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c in step S20-8 is compared with the checksum calculated from the data in the used area of the main RAM 110c at the time of the initialization processing at the next power-on (FIG. In step S10-14), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (whether the backup is valid and data recovery is possible) based on whether or not the two match.

  After the execution of step S20-8, the main CPU 110a sets the power-off occurrence information (S20-9). Thereafter, the main CPU 110a sets access to the main RAM 110c to be prohibited (S20-10). After the execution of step S20-10, the main CPU 110a performs an infinite loop to prepare for power-off.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110. The main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 executes a timer interrupt process every 4 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse signal in the reset clock pulse generation circuit in the main control board 110.

  In FIG. 35, when a reset clock pulse signal is generated, the main CPU 110a saves information in the register of the main CPU 110a at that time to a stack area (S100). Next, the main CPU 110a performs a time control process (S110). The time control process is a process of updating a counter used for counting various times in the main RAM 110c. In the time control process, the main CPU 110a decrements the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, and the auxiliary game timer counter in the main RAM 110c by one.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs a random number update process (S120). In the random number updating process, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot random number value, the ordinary symbol random number value, and the special symbol random number value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a updates each random number counter by +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is reset to 0, and each random number value is newly updated from the initial random number value at that time. .

  After execution of step S120, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random value update process (S130). In the initial random value updating process, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot initial random value, the ordinary symbol initial random value, and the special symbol initial random value.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs an input control process (S200). In the input control process, the main CPU 110a includes a general winning opening detecting switch 12a, a first winning opening detecting switch 16a, a second winning opening detecting switch 17a, a first starting opening detecting switch 14a, a second starting opening detecting switch 15a, It is determined whether or not an input has been made to various switches of the gate detection switch 13a. If an input has been made, predetermined data is set. Details of the procedure of the input control process will be described later.

  After the execution of step S200, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure special power control process (S300). In the special figure special power control processing, the main CPU 110a updates the value of the special figure special power processing data provided in the main RAM 110c according to the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1, and performs the special symbol storage determination processing (the special figure special power processing). Data = 0), special symbol variation processing (special special processing data = 1), special symbol stop processing (special special processing data = 2), big hit game processing (special One of the five processes of the figure special power processing data = 3) and the jackpot game end processing (the processing of special figure special power processing data = 4) is selected and executed. The details of the special figure special power control process will be described later.

  After the execution of step S300, the main CPU 110a performs an ordinary power control process (S400). In the ordinary figure ordinary power control processing, the main CPU 110a updates the value of the ordinary figure ordinary electric power processing data provided in the main RAM 110c according to the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1, and performs the ordinary symbol storage determination processing (the ordinary figure ordinary A process when the general-purpose process data = 0, a normal symbol variation process (a process when the general-purpose process data = 1), a normal symbol stop process (a process when the general-purpose process data = 2), And one of the four processes of the auxiliary game process (the process when the general-purpose general-purpose process data = 3) is selected and executed. Details of the procedure of the general-purpose power control process will be described later.

  After the execution of step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a payout control process (S500). In the payout control process, the main CPU 110a refers to the general winning opening prize ball counter, the first starting opening prize ball counter, and the second starting opening prize ball counter in the main RAM 110c, and pays out the number of game balls indicated by each counter. Is generated, and this command is transmitted to the payout control board 130. Upon receiving the payout number designation command, the payout control board 130 controls the payout motor 131 of the payout device to pay out the game balls.

  After the execution of step S500, the main CPU 110a performs a data generation process (S600). In the data generation process, the main CPU 110a outputs data for external output, starting opening / closing solenoid data, first winning opening / closing solenoid data, second winning opening / closing solenoid data, special symbol display device data, normal symbol display device data, Generate a storage number specification command.

  After the execution of step S600, the main CPU 110a performs an error determination process (S700). In the error determination process, the main CPU 110a determines whether an error has occurred, and when determining that an error has occurred, sets an error command indicating the type of the error that has occurred in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. . In addition, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the generated error has been resolved, and when it is determined that the error has been resolved, sets an error resolution command indicating the resolved error in the effect transmission data storage area.

  After the execution of step S700, the main CPU 110a performs an output control process (S800). In the output control process, the main CPU 110a outputs the signals of the external output data, the starting opening / closing solenoid data, the first winning opening / closing solenoid data, and the second winning opening / closing solenoid data generated in the data generation process of step S600. Perform port output processing to be performed. In addition, in order to turn on each LED of the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, and the ordinary symbol display device 22, the special symbol display device data created in the data generation process of step S600 and the ordinary symbol display device data are used. A display device output process for outputting the symbol display device data is performed. Further, a command transmission process of transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 120 is also performed.

  After execution of step S800, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in the stack area in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a (S900).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing details of the input control process. In FIG. 36, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process (S210). In the general winning opening detection switch input processing, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detection switch 12a. If there is no input of the detection signal, the process directly proceeds to step S220. When the detection signal is input, a predetermined number (for example, 10) is added to the general winning opening prize ball counter in the main RAM 110c and updated.

  After execution of step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening detection switch input process (S220). In the special winning opening detection switch input processing, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first special winning opening detection switch 16a or the second special winning opening detection switch 17a. The main CPU 110a proceeds to step S230 if no detection signal is input from any of the first special winning opening detection switch 16a and the second special winning opening detection switch 17a. When a detection signal is input from the first special winning opening detection switch 16a or the second special winning opening detection switch 17a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) is added to the special winning opening prize ball counter in the main RAM 110c. Then, the number of winning balls (C) in the special winning opening (C) storage area in the main RAM 110c is updated by adding +1.

  After the execution of step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process (S230). In the first starting port detection switch input processing, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 14a. When there is no input of the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 14a, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S240. When a detection signal is input from the first starting port detection switch 14a, the prize ball counter is updated, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol holding number (U1) is less than 4, and the first special symbol holding is performed. Updating the first special symbol holding number (U1) when the number (U1) is less than 4, storing a random number value in the special symbol holding storage area, preliminarily determining a jackpot lottery, and specifying a start winning prize according to the determination result A series of processes such as a set of commands, a set of special symbol holding number designation commands according to the first special symbol holding number (U1), and the like are performed. The details of the procedure of the first starting port detection switch input processing will be described later.

  After the execution of step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a second starting port detection switch input process (S240). In the second starting port detection switch input processing, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the second starting port detection switch 15a. When there is no input of the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 15a, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S250. When a detection signal is input from the second starting port detection switch 15a, the prize ball counter is updated, a determination is made as to whether or not the second special symbol holding number (U2) is less than 4, and the second special symbol holding is performed. Updating the second special symbol holding number (U2) when the number (U2) is less than 4, storing a random number value in the special symbol holding storage area, preliminarily determining a jackpot lottery, and specifying a start winning prize according to the determination result A series of processes, such as a command set, a special symbol reserved number designation command according to the reserved number (U2) in the second special symbol reserved number (U2), and the like are performed. The procedure of the second starting port detection switch input processing and the procedure of the first starting port detection switch input processing are the same except for the difference in the data write destination.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process (S250). In the gate detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 13a. When there is no input of the detection signal from the gate detection switch 13a, the main CPU 110a ends the current input control process. When a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 13a, the main CPU 110a generates a gate passage designation command and sets the generated gate passage designation command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Also, in this case, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the count value (G) of the ordinary symbol holding number counter for counting the ordinary symbol holding number (G) is less than 4. When the count value (G) of the ordinary symbol holding number counter is less than 4, the count value (G) is updated by adding +1 and the ordinary symbol random value is acquired. It is stored in the symbol hold storage area.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing details of the first starting port detection switch input processing. In FIG. 37, when the detection signal is input from the first starting port detection switch 14a (S230-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S230-2. If the detection signal has not been input from the first starting port detection switch 14a (S230-1: No), the current first starting port detection switch input processing ends.

  In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a updates the starting opening prize ball counter by adding a predetermined number (for example, three) to the starting opening prize ball counter (S230-2). Thereafter, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter for counting the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4 (S230-3).

  When the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter is not less than 4 (S230-3: No), the main CPU 110a ends the first start-up opening detection switch input process this time. When the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter is less than 4 (S230-3: Yes), the count value (U1) is updated by adding +1 (S230-4).

  After the execution of step S230-4, the main CPU 110a acquires the jackpot random number value, and stores the data not stored in the first to fourth storage units of the first special symbol holding storage area of the special symbol holding storage area and the most significant number. The small storage unit is set as a data storage destination, and the obtained jackpot random number value is stored in the storage unit of the data storage destination (S230-5).

  FIG. 38A is a diagram showing a special symbol holding storage area. As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the special symbol holding storage area includes a zero storage unit corresponding to the change, a first special symbol holding storage area corresponding to holding the first special symbol, and a second special symbol holding storage area. It has a second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to holding. Each of the first special symbol holding storage area and the second special symbol holding storage area is a first memory corresponding to the first holding, a second memory corresponding to the second holding, and a third memory corresponding to the third holding. And a fourth storage unit corresponding to the fourth hold. As shown in FIG. 38 (b), each storage unit in the special symbol holding storage unit can store a set of a jackpot random number, a special symbol random number, a reach determination random number, and a special figure change random number. It has become.

  After the execution of step S230-5, the main CPU 110a acquires a special symbol random value, and stores the acquired special symbol random value in the storage unit of the data storage destination in the first special symbol holding storage area (S230-6). .

  After execution of step S230-6, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure variation random number and the reach determination random number, and stores the acquired special figure variation random number and the reach determination random number in the first special symbol holding storage area. (S230-7).

  After execution of step S230-7, the main CPU 110a performs a preliminary determination process (S230-8). In this preliminary determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table of the main ROM 110b, and sets the flag in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time reduction game flag storage area at the time of execution of this step S230-8 (when the start condition is satisfied). And the jackpot random number, the special symbol random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure change random number stored in the storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area in steps S230-5 to S230-7. Based on this combination, the winning information of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol this time is determined.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a pre-judgment table for judging a jackpot lottery result in advance. The prior determination table includes a jackpot random number value, a special symbol random number value, a game state (a time saving game state or a non-time saving game state), a reach determination random number value, a special figure change random number value, winning information, and a start winning designation command. The set refers to when the start condition of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is satisfied, and refers to when the start condition of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21 is satisfied. And are stored separately.

  In FIG. 37, after execution of step S230-8, the main CPU 110a generates a start winning designation command corresponding to the winning information determined in the preliminary determination process of step S230-8, and transmits the start winning designation command to the production transmission data. It is set in the storage area (S230-9). Thereafter, the main CPU 110a refers to the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter, generates a special symbol reservation number designation command indicating the first special symbol reservation number (U1), and designates this special symbol reservation number designation. The command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S230-10).

  The start winning designation command and the special symbol reservation number designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area are transmitted to the effect control board 120 in the output control process (S700) of the timer interrupt process. The effect control board 120 determines the content of the effect prior to the change of the special symbol based on the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol this time, based on the description content of the start winning designation command, and specifies the determined content of the effect. The command to be transmitted is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

  Here, the procedure of the second start-up opening detection switch input processing (S240) is such that the reference number of the reserved number in steps S230-3 and S230-4 is the second special symbol reserved number counter, and steps S230-5 to S230. -7, the storage destination of the random value is the second special symbol storage area, the reference of the random value in step S230-8 is the second special symbol storage area, and the number of reservations in step S230-10. Is the same as that of the first start-up opening detection switch input processing (S230) except that the reference destination is the second special symbol reservation number counter.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure special power control process. In FIG. 40, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special power processing data (S301). In the subsequent step S302, the main CPU 110a refers to the branch address from the loaded special figure special power processing data, and if the special figure special power processing data = 0, shifts the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing (step S310). If the special power processing data = 1, the processing shifts to the special symbol fluctuation processing (step S320), and if the special power processing data = 2, the processing shifts to the special symbol stop processing (step S330), and the special power processing data = If it is 3, the process proceeds to the jackpot game process (step S340), and if the special figure special power processing data = 4, the process proceeds to the jackpot game end process (step S350).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol storage determination process. In FIG. 41, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special symbol is being changed and displayed (S310-1). More specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter in the main RAM 110c, and if the special symbol time counter is not 0, determines that the special symbol is being changed and displayed, and sets the special symbol time counter to 0. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is not being changed and displayed. When the special symbol is being changed and displayed (S310-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a terminates the current special symbol storage determination process. If the special symbol is not being changed (S310-1: No), the process proceeds to step S310-2.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a refers to the count value (U2) of the second special symbol reservation number counter in the main RAM 110c, and determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more. When the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more (S310-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a updates the count value (U2) of the second special symbol reservation number counter by -1 (S310-). 3). Here, the gaming machine 1 is a model that uses the suspension of the change of the second special symbol in preference to the suspension of the change of the first special symbol. In these types of gaming machines, prior determination is not performed during the time-saving gaming state even if the start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied.

  When the count value (U2) of the second special symbol reservation number counter is not 1 or more (S310-2: No), the main CPU 110a refers to the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter and performs the first special symbol reservation. It is determined whether the number of symbol reservations (U1) is 1 or more (S310-4).

  When the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more (S310-4: No), the main CPU 110a performs a customer waiting setting process (S310-5). In the customer waiting setting process, the main CPU 110a checks whether the customer waiting flag is set in the customer waiting flag storage area. When the customer wait flag is not set in the customer wait flag storage area, the main CPU 110a sets the customer wait designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and sets the customer wait flag in the customer wait flag storage area.

  When the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more (S310-4: Yes), the main CPU 110a updates the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter by -1 (S310-). 6). After executing step S310-3 or S310-6, the main CPU 110a performs a storage area shift process (S310-7). In the storage area shift process, the main CPU 110a processes the first special symbol holding storage area and the second special symbol holding storage area that correspond to the symbol from which the number of holds is subtracted in step S310-3 or S310-6. The following processing is performed as a target.

  When the main CPU 110a subtracts the count value (U2) of the second special symbol reservation number counter in step S310-3, the main CPU 110a stores the data in the second to fourth storage units of the second special symbol reservation storage area for each one. The data is shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage area is written to the 0th storage unit that is the determination storage area. By writing the data to the 0th storage unit, the random numbers (the jackpot random number, the special symbol random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure variation random number) stored in the 0th storage unit up to that point are erased. Is done.

  When the main CPU 110a has subtracted the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter in step S310-6, the main CPU 110a stores the data in the second to fourth storage units of the first special symbol reservation storage area. The data in the first storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area is written to the 0th storage unit. By writing the data to the 0th storage unit, the random numbers (the jackpot random number, the special symbol random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure variation random number) stored in the 0th storage unit up to that point are erased. Is done.

  After the execution of step S310-7, the main CPU 110a checks whether or not the customer waiting flag is set in the customer waiting flag storage area. It is cleared (S310-8).

  After execution of step S310-8, the main CPU 110a generates a special symbol reservation number designation command for notifying the effect control board 120 of the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the second special symbol reservation number (U2). The special symbol reservation number designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S310-9).

  After execution of step S310-9, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process (S311). In this jackpot determination process, the main CPU 110a determines the lottery result (jackpot or loss) of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the current start condition, and determines the type of jackpot if the jackpot is determined. Is generated and set in the effect transmission data storage area. If it is a loss, a design specification command for the loss is generated and set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 42 (flowchart showing the details of the jackpot determination process), the main CPU 110a determines in the jackpot determination process that the lottery result of the jackpot It is determined which of the following is a loss or a loss (S311-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot lottery determination table corresponding to the current setting in the main ROM 110b, and determines whether or not a flag has been set in the high-probability game flag storage area at the time of execution of step S311-1. The lottery result is determined based on the combination with the jackpot random number value stored in the 0th storage unit in S310-7.

  FIG. 43 (a) is a diagram showing a jackpot lottery determination table referred to in step S311-1. As shown in FIG. 43A, the jackpot lottery determination table includes a table of setting 1, a table of setting 2, a table of setting 3, a table of setting 4, a table of setting 5, and a table of setting 6. There is a table. In the jackpot lottery determination tables of the settings 1 to 6, a set of the jackpot random number value and the lottery result (jackpot or loss) of the jackpot lottery is referred to in the low-probability gaming state and referred to in the high-probability gaming state. And stored separately.

  In the jackpot lottery determination table of the setting 1, the random number range of the jackpot random value in the low-probability gaming state is 0 to 598, and two values ("7" and "8") of the jackpot among 0 to 598 are used. It is. In addition, in the jackpot lottery determination table of the setting 1, the random number range of the jackpot random number value in the high-probability gaming state is 0 to 598, and the jackpot of 20 values (from “7” to “26” ").

  In the jackpot lottery determination table of the setting 2, the random number range of the jackpot random value in the low-probability gaming state is 0 to 578, and two values ("7" and "8") of the jackpot are 0 to 578. It is. In addition, in the jackpot lottery determination table of setting 2, the random number range of the jackpot random value in the high-probability gaming state is 0 to 598, which is common to the setting 1, and 20 of the 0 to 598 become the jackpot ("" 7 "to" 26 ").

  In the jackpot lottery determination table of setting 3, the random number range of the jackpot random value in the low-probability gaming state is 0 to 548, and two of the 0 to 548 jackpots ("7" and "8") become the jackpot. It is. In addition, in the jackpot lottery determination table of the setting 3, the random number range of the jackpot random value in the high-probability gaming state is 0 to 598, which is common to the setting 1, and 20 of the 0 to 598 become the jackpot ("" 7 "to" 26 ").

  In the jackpot lottery determination table of the setting 4, the random number range of the jackpot random value in the low-probability gaming state is 0 to 528, and two values ("7" and "8") of the jackpot are 0 to 528. It is. In addition, in the jackpot lottery determination table of the setting 4, the random number range of the jackpot random number value in the high-probability gaming state is 0 to 598, which is common to the setting 1, and 20 of the 0 to 598 become the jackpot (" 7 "to" 26 ").

  In the jackpot lottery determination table of setting 5, the random number range of the jackpot random value in the low-probability gaming state is 0 to 508, and the two jackpots out of 0 to 508 ("7" and "8"). It is. In addition, in the jackpot lottery determination table of the setting 5, the random number range of the jackpot random value in the high-probability gaming state is 0 to 598, which is common to the setting 1, and 20 of the 0 to 598 become the jackpot (" 7 "to" 26 ").

  In the jackpot lottery determination table of setting 6, the random number range of the jackpot random value in the low-probability gaming state is 0 to 488, and two of the 0 to 488 jackpots ("7" and "8") are the jackpot. It is. In addition, in the jackpot lottery determination table of the setting 6, the random number range of the jackpot random number value in the high-probability gaming state is 0 to 598, which is common to the setting 1, and 20 of the 0 to 598 become the jackpot ("" 7 "to" 26 ").

  In this way, in the gaming machine 1, the random number range of the jackpot random value is changed by setting, and is 0-598, 0-578, 0-548, 0-528, 0-508, 0-488. Therefore, the jackpot probabilities in the low-probability gaming state are 1/599 (= 1 / 299.5), 1/579 (= 1 / 289.5), 1/549 (= 1 / 274.5), 1 / 529 (= 1 / 264.5), 1/509 (= 1 / 254.5), or 1/489 (= 1 / 244.5). On the other hand, the random number range in the high-probability gaming state is not changed by the setting, and the jackpot winning probability is 20/599 (= 1 / 29.9) regardless of the setting. By fixing the random number range at the time of low probability to a large numerical value (for example, 65536) and changing the number of jackpot random numbers by setting, it is also possible to change the jackpot winning probability at the time of the low probability gaming state. Also in this case, it is desirable to fix the number of the jackpot random numbers in the high-probability gaming state to fix the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state. If the winning probability in the high-probability gaming state is changed by the setting, the player can easily find out which setting is being set, which is effective in preventing the setting.

  When the determination result in step S311-1 is a big hit (S311-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S311-2, and when the determination result in step S311-1 is a loss (S311-1: No), the process proceeds to step S311-5.

  In step S311-2, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot symbol determination process. In the big hit symbol determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the big hit symbol determination table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the special symbol random number value stored in the 0th storage unit in step S310-8, stops the stop symbol of the change. The symbol data is determined, and the determined stop symbol data is stored in the stop symbol data storage area in the main RAM 110c. Here, the stop symbol data indicates a two-digit number ("00" to "07") corresponding to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed after the change.

  FIG. 44 (a) is a diagram showing a big hit symbol determination table. In the jackpot symbol determination table, a set of a special symbol random number, a type of special symbol (type of jackpot), stop symbol data, and a symbol designating command is a condition for starting the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20. Are stored when the start condition of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21 is satisfied.

  The symbol designating command is a command for notifying the effect control board 120 of the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed after the change.

  The stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area in this step S311-2 is used when determining the big hit symbol in the special symbol stop process, when determining the operation mode of the big winning opening in the big hit game process, and in the big hit game end process. It is referred to when determining the gaming state. Details will be described later.

  Next, the main CPU 110a generates a symbol designating command for the big hit corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-2, and sets the symbol designating command in the effect transmission data storage area (S311-3).

  Next, the main CPU 110a determines the current game state (at the time of the jackpot lottery) based on the presence / absence of a flag in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-short game flag storage area, and obtains game state information indicating the determined game state. It is stored in the gaming state buffer (S311-4). Specifically, when both the high-probability game flag and the time saving game flag are not set, the main CPU 110a sets the data of “00H” as the game state information in the game state buffer. If the high-probability game flag is set and the time-saving game flag is not set, data of "01H" is set in the game state buffer as game state information. When the high-probability game flag is not set and the time-saving game flag is set, the data of "02H" is set in the game state buffer as the game state information. When both the high-probability game flag and the time saving game flag are set, the data of “03H” is set in the game state buffer as the game state information.

  In step S311-5, the main CPU 110a performs a lost symbol determination process. In the losing symbol determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the losing symbol determination table of the main ROM 110b to determine the stop symbol data of the losing stop symbol, and stores the determined stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area.

  FIG. 44 (b) is a diagram showing a loss symbol design table. In the losing symbol determination table, a set of a special symbol type, stop symbol data, and a symbol designating command is referred to when a first special symbol display condition in the first special symbol display device 20 is satisfied and a second symbol. The second special symbol display device 21 stores the second special symbol separately for reference when the start condition is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 110a generates a symbol designating command for a loss corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-5, and sets the symbol designating command in the effect transmission data storage area (S311-6).

  Returning to the description of FIG. After the execution of the jackpot determination process (S311), the main CPU 110a performs a variation pattern determination process (S312). In the variation pattern determination processing, the main CPU 110a refers to the variation pattern determination table in the main ROM 110b, and determines the lottery result (big success or loss) of the big hit lottery in step S311-1 and the time saving game flag storage area at the time of execution of this step S312. Presence / absence of a flag, the number of updates (U2) or (U1) after update in step S310-3 or step S310-6, the jackpot random number stored in the 0th storage unit in step S310-7, and the random number for reach determination , And a variation pattern of the variation based on the combination of the special figure variation random value.

  There are two types of variation pattern determination tables, one that refers when the first special symbol fluctuates and one that refers when the second special symbol fluctuates. FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern determination table referred to when the first special symbol varies. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table referred to when the second special symbol varies.

  Here, the gaming machine 1 can change the setting of the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the low-probability gaming state by the first special start-up operation (FIG. 26A). The variation pattern determination table that is sometimes referred to and the variation pattern determination table that is referenced when the second special symbol varies are common. Even if the variation pattern determination table to be referred to for each setting is different, a common selection rate is used in order to prevent the player from being informed of the setting due to the difference in the selection rate of the variation pattern. I want to keep it.

  Thereby, regardless of the setting, the selection rate of each reach → development effect at the time of the jackpot change is fixed, and the selectivity of each reach → development effect at the time of the loss change is also fixed. Therefore, since the variation pattern selection rate is common for each setting, the overall appearance rate of the reach → development effect can be increased as the setting of the winning probability is more advantageous for the player. Further, as the setting of the winning probability is more advantageous for the player, the overall reliability of the reach → development effect can be increased.

  However, the winning probability of the high probability is common to each setting, and the fluctuation pattern determination table referred to when the first special symbol fluctuates and the fluctuation pattern determination table referred to when the second special symbol fluctuates must also be common. Therefore, at the time of the high probability, the setting of the winning probability does not change the appearance rate and reliability of each reach → development effect, so that it is difficult for the player to know which setting is being set.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination table includes the special symbol type (big hit type), the game state (time saving game state or non-time saving game state), the number of holds, the random number value for reach determination, the random number value for special figure change, A set of the type of the fluctuation pattern of the symbol, the fluctuation time, and the fluctuation start command is stored. The change start command is a command for notifying the effect control board 120 of the type of the change pattern.

  In the special pattern change pattern determination table, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, a change pattern with a long change time is easily selected. Conversely, in the special pattern change pattern determination table, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, a change pattern with a short change time is easily selected.

  For example, in the variation pattern determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 45, the options of the variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol 1 (per 16R probability variation) are the variation patterns 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17. There are seven types.

  The fluctuation patterns 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16 advance from the establishment of the reach to the development effect. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 11 is T1 (for example, T1 = 18000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 12 is T2 (for example, T2 = 20,000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 13 is T3 (for example, T3 = 22000 ms). The variation time of the variation pattern 14 is T4 (for example, T4 = 40000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 15 is T5 (for example, T5 = 42000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 16 is T6 (for example, T6 = 60000 ms). The fluctuation pattern 17 proceeds from the establishment of the reach to the full rotation reach effect. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 17 is T7 (T7 = 62000 ms). The magnitude relationship between the fluctuation times T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, and T7 is T1 <T2 <T3 <T4 <T5 <T6 <T7. Among the variation patterns 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17, the magnitude relationship of the six types of selectivity excluding the variation pattern 17 is as follows: variation pattern 11 <variation pattern 12 <variation pattern 13 <variation pattern 14 < The variation pattern 15 is smaller than the variation pattern 16.

  Further, in the first special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45, the special symbol 0 (losing), the non-time saving gaming state, the number of holds 0 to 2, and the reach (the reach determination random number is “70 to 99”) Are seven types of variation patterns 9, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. The fluctuation pattern 9 is a loss (normal reach loss) without proceeding from the establishment of the reach to the development effect. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 9 is T9 (for example, T9 = 6000 ms). The magnitude relation of the selectivity of the variation patterns 9, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 is as follows: variation pattern 9> variation pattern 1> variation pattern 2> variation pattern 3> variation pattern 4> variation pattern 5> variation pattern It is 6.

  Further, when the special pattern change pattern determination table is compared with the pre-determination table (FIG. 39) described above, the pre-determination table shows that the number of pending changes (U1) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol The corresponding data in the table can be searched without referring to the number of pending changes (U2). On the other hand, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the fluctuation pattern determination table does not refer to the number of fluctuations reserved for the first special symbol (U1) or the number of fluctuations reserved for the second special symbol (U2). As long as the corresponding data in the table can not be searched. For this reason, in the advance determination table, it is possible to determine the type of the effect of the development destination after the reach effect, but not to determine the “normal variation” and the “short variation”.

  In FIG. 41, the main CPU 110a generates a change start command corresponding to the change pattern determined in step S312, and sets the change start command in the effect transmission data storage area (S313).

  Next, the main CPU 110a determines the current game state based on the presence or absence of the flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time saving game flag storage area, and generates a game state designation command corresponding to the determined game state, This game state designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S314).

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs a process for starting the variable display of the special symbol (S315). More specifically, the main CPU 110a stores, in a predetermined processing area, variable display data for causing the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 to perform a variable display (LED blinking) of the special symbol. set. When the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data for turning on or off the LED is created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. Alternatively, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets a fluctuation time based on the fluctuation pattern determined in step S312 in the special symbol time counter (S316). The special symbol time counter is decremented every 4 milliseconds in step S110.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special power processing data = 1 (S317), and ends the current special symbol storage determination processing. In the special figure special power control processing thereafter, the processing shifts to the special symbol change processing in step S302, and the special symbol change processing is performed.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol changing process. In FIG. 47, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed (S320-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S316, and if the special symbol time counter is 0, determines that the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed. If not, it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special symbol has not yet elapsed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (S320-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S320-2. If it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation time has not elapsed (S320-1: No), the current special symbol fluctuation process is terminated, and the next subroutine is executed.

  In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the change display of the special symbol. More specifically, the main CPU 110a clears the variable display data set in step S315 and displays the special symbol set in step S311-2 or S311-5 on the first special symbol display device 20 or the first special symbol display device. (2) Stop symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 21 is set in a predetermined processing area (S320-2). As a result, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation stop command in the effect transmission data storage area (S320-3).

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets a symbol stop time (0.5 seconds = 125 counters) in the special symbol time counter (S320-4). The special symbol time counter is decremented every 4 milliseconds in step S110.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets 2 in the special figure special power processing data (S320-5), and terminates the current special symbol change processing. In the special figure special power control processing thereafter, the processing shifts to the special symbol stop processing in step S302, and the special symbol stop processing is performed.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol stop processing. In FIG. 48, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol stop time has elapsed (S330-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S320-4, and if the special symbol time counter is 0, determines that the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed. If it is not 0, it is determined that the special symbol stop time has not yet elapsed. When determining that the special symbol stop time has elapsed (S330-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S330-2. If it is determined that the special symbol stop time has not elapsed (S330-1: No), the current special symbol stop processing is terminated, and the next subroutine is executed.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a performs a time saving game end determination process. In the time saving game end determination processing, the main CPU 110a checks whether the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area. If the time saving game flag is not set in the time saving game flag storage area, the process directly proceeds to step S330-3. When the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area, the number of time savings (J) in the number of time savings (J) storage area is updated by −1, and the updated time savings number (J) is 0. Determine whether or not. As a result, if the number of time savings (J) is 0, the time saving game flag set in the time saving game flag storage area is cleared, and then the process proceeds to step S330-3. If the number of time savings (J) is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S330-3 with the time savings game flag set in the time savings game flag storage area.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game end determination process. In the high-probability game end determination processing, the main CPU 110a checks whether the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area. If the high-probability game flag is not set in the high-probability game flag storage area, the process directly proceeds to step S330-4. If the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area, the high-probability game count (X) in the high-probability game count (X) storage area is updated by −1, and the updated high probability game count is updated. It is determined whether the number of games (X) is 0 or not. As a result, when the high-probability game count (X) is 0, the high-probability game flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S330-4. If the high-probability game count (X) is not 0, the process proceeds to step S330-4 with the high-probability game flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area.

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a obtains the current game state based on the presence / absence of the flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time reduction game flag storage area, and issues a game state designation command corresponding to the determined game state. Generated and set this gaming state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stopped symbol data in the stopped symbol data storage area is a big hit or a lost one (S330-5). When the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is lost (S330-5: No), the main CPU 110a sets 0 to the special symbol special electric process data (S330-6), and stops the special symbol this time. The process ends. In the subsequent special figure special power control processing, the process proceeds to the special symbol storage determination processing in step S302, and the special symbol storage determination processing is performed.

  When the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is a big hit (S330-5: Yes), the main CPU 110a sets 3 in the special figure special electric processing data (S330-10). Next, the main CPU 110a resets the gaming state, the number of high-probability games (X), and the number of reductions in time (J) at that time (S330-11). More specifically, when the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area, the main CPU 110a clears the data in the high-probability game flag storage area and the high-probability game count (X) storage area. . When the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area, the main CPU 110a clears the data in the time saving game flag storage area and the number of time savings (J) storage area.

  After execution of step S330-11, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot start preparation setting process (S330-12). In the jackpot start preparation setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game control table in the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area, the 16R winning large winning opening opening / closing control table, The winning destination opening / closing control table and the 2R winning special winning opening / closing control table are determined as reference targets.

  FIG. 49 is a view showing a special game control table. FIG. 50 (a) is a diagram showing a 16R winning big winning opening opening / closing control table. FIG. 50B is a diagram showing an 8R winning big winning opening opening / closing control table. FIG. 50 (c) is a diagram showing a 2R winning big winning opening opening / closing control table.

  In the special game control table, sets of stop symbol data, opening time, table number of the reference winning opening / closing control table, and ending time are stored for each type of big hit. Here, the table number of the special winning opening opening / closing control table for 16R is 01, the table number of the special winning opening opening / closing control table for 8R is 02, and the table number of the special winning opening opening / closing control table for 2R is 03.

  The 16R-per-winning winning opening / closing control table stores data indicating the opening time and closing time of the first to 16th rounds per 16R and the type of the winning opening to be opened. The 8R-win special winning opening opening / closing control table stores data indicating the opening time and closing time of the first to eighth rounds per 8R and the type of the special winning opening to be opened. In the 2R winning special winning opening opening / closing control table, data indicating the opening time and closing time of the first round and the second round per 2R, and the type of the winning winning opening to be opened are stored.

  The main CPU 110a determines the type of the jackpot based on the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, generates an opening designation command corresponding to the type of the jackpot, and transmits the opening designation command to the production transmission data. It is set in the storage area (S330-13).

  The main CPU 110a determines the start interval time according to the type of the jackpot based on the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, and sets the start interval time in the special symbol time counter (S330-14). ), The special symbol stop processing of this time is ended. In the special figure special power control process thereafter, the process proceeds to the big hit game process in step S302, and the big hit game process is performed.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the details of the jackpot game process. In FIG. 51, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently being performed (S340-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the number of rounds (R) in the number-of-rounds (R) storage area, and if the number of rounds (R) is 0, determines that the opening is in progress, and determines the number of rounds (R). If it is not 0, it is determined that the opening is not being performed. When the main CPU 110a is opening (S340-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-2. If the opening is not being performed (S340-1: No), the process proceeds to step S340-6.

  In step S340-2, main CPU 110a determines whether or not the start interval time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S330-14 of the special symbol stop process, and if the special symbol time counter is 0, determines that the start interval time has elapsed, and If the symbol time counter is not 0, it is determined that the start interval time has not yet elapsed. When determining that the start interval time has elapsed (S340-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-3. When it is determined that the start interval time has not yet elapsed (S340-2: No), the present big hit game process is ended.

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot start setting process. In the jackpot start setting process, the main CPU 110a updates the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area by +1. Here, when the start interval time has elapsed, no operation has been performed yet, and the number of rounds (R) in the number-of-rounds (R) storage area is zero. Therefore, the number of rounds (R) after the update in step S340-3 is one.

  After executing step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process (S340-4). In this special winning opening opening process, in order to open the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b or the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b, the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c is energized. Set the energization data to be activated. Further, the main CPU 110a refers to the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12 to determine the opening time of the first special winning opening 16 or the second special winning opening 17 in the current number of rounds (R). The opening time is set in a special game timer counter.

  After executing Step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs a round start command transmission determination process (S340-5). In the round start command transmission determination process, the main CPU 110a generates a round start command corresponding to the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area, and sets the round start command in the effect transmission data storage area. This ends the big hit game processing.

  In step S340-6, main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. When it is determined that the ending is not being performed (S340-6: No), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-7. If it is determined that the ending is being performed (S340-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-18.

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special winning opening is being closed. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that the energization data (the energization data for energizing the first special winning opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second special winning opening / closing solenoid 17c) is not set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. When it is determined that the winning opening is closed, and when the energization data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, it is determined that the winning opening is not closed. When the special winning opening is closed (S340-7: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-8. When the special winning opening is not closed (S340-7: No), the process proceeds to step S340-9.

  In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the closing time has elapsed. Here, the closing time is set in a special game timer counter in step S340-10 described later. When determining that the closing time has elapsed (S340-8: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to the special winning opening opening process of step S340-4, and performs the special winning opening opening process and the subsequent round start command transmission determining process (S340). -5) is performed, and the current jackpot game process ends. When determining that the closing time has not elapsed (S340-8: No), the main CPU 110a ends the current big hit game process.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening condition of the special winning opening has been satisfied. Specifically, the main CPU 110a opens when the number of large winning opening balls (C) in the special winning opening number of balls (C) storage area reaches a specified number (9) or when the opening time elapses. It is determined that the termination condition has been satisfied. In addition, the main CPU 110a determines that the number (C) of winning holes in the special winning opening (C) storage area has not reached the specified number (9) and that the opening time has not elapsed. In this case, it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied. When the main CPU 110a determines that the opening end condition has been satisfied (S340-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-10. If it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied (S340-9: No), the current big hit game process ends.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the special winning opening closing process, the main CPU 110a closes the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b or the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b so as to close the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid. The energization data for energizing 17c is stopped. Further, the main CPU 110a refers to the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, and determines the first special winning opening 16 or the second special winning opening 17 based on the current round number (R). The closing time is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the special winning opening is closed.

  After execution of step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not one round game has ended (S340-11). Specifically, the main CPU 110a executes one round game when the number of winning balls (C) in the special winning opening (C) storage area reaches the specified number (9). It is determined that the process has been completed. Further, the main CPU 110a ends one round game when the number of winning balls (C) in the special winning opening (C) storage area does not reach the specified number (9). It is determined that it has not been done. When determining that one round game has ended (S340-11: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-12. If it is determined that one round game has not been completed (S340-11: No), the current big hit game process is terminated.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a performs a round data initialization process. In the round data initialization process, the main CPU 110a resets the number of winning balls (C) in the special winning opening (C) storage area to zero.

  After execution of step S340-12, the main CPU 110a determines that the number of rounds (R) in the number-of-rounds (R) storage area is the maximum value (specifically, the final number of the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12). (The number of rounds) (S340-13).

  When it is determined that the number of rounds (R) is not the maximum value (S340-13: No), the main CPU 110a updates the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area by +1 (S340). -14), the big hit game process ends.

  When it is determined that the number of rounds (R) has reached the maximum value (S340-13: Yes), the main CPU 110a resets the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area to 0 (S340-). 15).

  After the execution of step S340-15, the main CPU 110a determines the type of the jackpot based on the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in the above step S330-12, and generates an ending designation command corresponding to the type of the jackpot, The ending designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S340-16).

  After execution of step S340-16, the main CPU 110a determines an end interval time (for example, 2 seconds) according to the type of the jackpot, and sets the end interval time in a special game timer counter (S340-17).

  After execution of step S340-17, or when it is determined that the ending is being performed in step S340-6 (S340-6: Yes), the main CPU 110a determines whether the end interval time has elapsed (S340-). 18). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game timer counter set in step S340-17, and if the special game timer counter is 0, determines that the end interval time has elapsed. If not, it is determined that the end interval time has not yet elapsed. When determining that the end interval time has not yet elapsed (S340-18: No), the main CPU 110a ends the current big hit game process.

  When determining that the end interval time has elapsed (S340-18: Yes), the main CPU 110a sets 4 in the special figure special power processing data (S340-19), and ends the current big hit game processing. In the special figure special power control process thereafter, the process proceeds to the big hit game end process in step S302, and the big hit game end process is performed.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot game end processing. In FIG. 52, the main CPU 110a loads the stop symbol data set in the stop symbol data storage area in step S311-2 and the game information set in the game state buffer in step S311-4 (S350-1).

  After execution of step S350-1, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game flag setting process (S350-2). In the high-probability game flag setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end time setting table in the main ROM 110b and, based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, sets the high probability at the end of the special game. The necessity of setting the game flag is determined.

  FIG. 53 is a view showing a special game end time setting table. In the special game end setting table, stop symbol data, data indicating the storage contents of the game state buffer, data indicating the necessity of the time saving game state, data indicating the number of time saving games, data indicating the necessity of the high probability game state , And a set of data indicating the number of high-probability games.

  Specifically, in step S350-1, if the stopped symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01 to 02, 04 to 06", a high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area. If it is other than "03,07", the high-probability game flag is not set in the high-probability game flag storage area.

  After execution of step S350-2, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game number setting process (S350-3). In the high-probability game state setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end time setting table in the main ROM 110b, and based on the stopped symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, at the time of the end of the special game, X) The number of remaining fluctuations (X) to be stored in the storage area is determined.

  Specifically, in step S350-2, if the stopped symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01 to 02, 04 to 06", 10000 times is set in the number-of-games (X) storage area, If it is other than "03, 07", 0 is set in the number-of-games (X) storage area.

  After execution of step S350-3, the main CPU 110a performs a time saving game flag setting process (S350-4). In the time-saving game flag setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end time setting table in the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, the time-saving game flag at the time of ending the special game. Is determined.

  Specifically, in step S350-3, if the stopped symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01 to 07", a time reduction game flag is set in the time reduction game flag storage area.

  After the execution of step S350-4, the main CPU 110a performs a number-of-time-savings setting process (S350-5). In the time-saving number setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end setting table in the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, at the end of the special game, the number of games (J). The number of remaining fluctuations (J) to be stored in the storage area is determined.

  Specifically, in this step S350-4, if the stopped symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is “01 to 02, 04 to 06”, 10000 times is set in the number of games (J) storage area. If it is other than "03, 07", 100 is set in the number-of-games (J) storage area.

  After execution of step S350-5, the main CPU 110a obtains the current game state based on the presence / absence of the flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-short game flag storage area, and specifies the game state corresponding to the current game state. A command is generated, and this game state designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S350-6).

  After execution of step S350-6, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the special figure special power processing data (S350-7), and ends the big hit game end processing. In the subsequent special figure special power control processing, the process proceeds to the special symbol storage determination processing in step S302, and the special symbol storage determination processing is performed.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the details of the general-purpose power control process. In FIG. 54, the main CPU 110a loads general-purpose general-purpose processing data (S401). In the subsequent step S402, the main CPU 110a refers to the branch address from the loaded special figure special power processing data, and if the general figure general processing data = 0, shifts the processing to the normal symbol storage determination processing. If the data = 1, the process is shifted to the normal symbol variation process. If the general data process data = 2, the process is shifted to the normal symbol stop process. If the general data process data = 3, the process is the auxiliary game process. Transfer processing.

  The outline of the ordinary symbol storage determination process, the ordinary symbol variation process, the ordinary symbol stop process, and the auxiliary game process is as follows. In the ordinary symbol storage determination process (the process of the ordinary symbol ordinary power process data = 0), the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the count value (G) of the ordinary symbol pending number counter is 1 or more. When the count value (G) of the ordinary symbol holding number counter is 0, the ordinary symbol storage determination process of this time is ended. When the count value (G) of the ordinary symbol holding number counter is 1 or more, the count value (G) of the ordinary symbol holding number counter is updated by −1, and then the second to second symbols in the ordinary symbol holding storage area are updated. The data in the fourth storage unit is shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit is written to the zeroth storage unit. At this time, the ordinary symbol random number value already written in the 0th storage section of the ordinary symbol hold storage area is deleted. Thereafter, the main CPU 110a refers to the ordinary symbol lottery determination table in the main ROM 110b, and based on a combination of the presence or absence of a flag in the time saving game flag storage area and the ordinary symbol random number value in the 0th storage unit of the ordinary symbol holding storage area. And determine the lottery result (hit or loss) of the normal symbol lottery, and set the normal symbol fluctuation time (29 seconds in the non-hours-saving gaming state, 0.2 seconds in the time-saving gaming state) according to the lottery result. decide.

  FIG. 43B is a diagram showing a normal symbol lottery determination table. The normal symbol lottery determination table is stored in the main ROM 110b of the main control board 110. In the ordinary symbol lottery determination table, a set of the ordinary symbol random number value and the ordinary symbol lottery lottery result (hit or loss) is referred to in the non-time-saving gaming state and in the time-saving gaming state. It is stored separately.

  Comparing the number of normal symbol determination random numbers in the non-time saving game state and the number of ordinary symbol determination random values in the time reduction game state in the normal symbol lottery determination table, While the normal symbol determination random number is only one (0), the normal symbol determination random number per hit in the time-saving gaming state is 65535 (0 to 65534). Usually, the random number range of the random number value for symbol determination is 0 to 65535. Therefore, the winning probability in the non-time-saving gaming state is 1/65536, and the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state is 65535/65536 = 1 / 1.00002.

  After determining the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery, the main CPU 110a sets the ordinary symbol variation time in the ordinary symbol time counter, starts the variation of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 22, and sets the ordinary symbol data to 1 Is set.

  In the normal symbol variation process (the process when the general symbol processing data = 1), the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (whether the ordinary symbol time counter has become 0) and determines whether the ordinary symbol variation has occurred. If it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the ordinary symbol variation process of this time is ended. When it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol of the ordinary symbol display device 22 is stopped and displayed with the symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol lottery result, and a predetermined ordinary symbol stop time is set in the ordinary symbol time counter. 2 is set to the figure general processing data.

  In the ordinary symbol stop process (the process when the ordinary symbol ordinary data processing data = 2), the main CPU 110a determines whether the ordinary symbol stop time has elapsed (whether the ordinary symbol time counter has become 0) and stops the ordinary symbol stop. If it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the current ordinary symbol stop processing ends. When it is determined that the normal symbol stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the stopped symbol of the ordinary symbol display device 22 is a winning symbol. If the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol display device 22 is not a winning symbol, 0 is set in the ordinary symbol general electric processing data, and if the stopped symbol of the ordinary symbol display device 22 is a winning symbol, the ordinary symbol 3. Set 3 in the general-purpose processing data.

  In the auxiliary game process (the process when the general-purpose data processing data = 3), the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the second starting port 15 (0.2 seconds in the non-time-saving game state, and 0.2 seconds in the time-saving game state). (3.5 seconds), the second start-up port 15 is set to the open state over this open time, and thereafter, the second start-up port 15 is set to the closed state, and 0 is set to the general-purpose general-purpose processing data.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a main process of the effect control board 120 of the gaming machine 1. In the main process, a system reset is generated from the power supply board 170 to the sub CPU 120a of the effect control board 120 by a start operation (normal start operation, RAM clear start operation, first special start operation, or second special start operation). Started as an opportunity.

  In FIG. 55, the sub CPU 120a performs an initialization process (S1000). In the initialization process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of muting the sound, a process of returning the accessory, a process of displaying a color bar as a game standby image, and the like. The sub CPU 120a waits for the elapse of a predetermined standby period while keeping the display image of the image display device 31 as the game standby image (FIG. 57), and displays the display image of the image display device 31 in the image of the customer waiting state (the left symbol in the stopped state). 36L, a middle symbol 36C, and a right symbol 36R). This standby period is at least longer (for example, 8 seconds) than the time required from the power-on of the main control board 110 to the end of the initialization processing (S10 in FIG. 29). When receiving a command from the main control board 110 during the standby period, the sub CPU 120a performs a process according to the received command. Details of the initialization process will be described later.

  When the display image on the image display device 31 becomes an image in the customer waiting state after the elapse of the standby period in the initialization process, the player can play a game. After the end of the initialization process, the sub CPU 120a repeats the process (S1100) of updating the effect random number value and the like. In addition to the random number updating process, the sub CPU 120a executes a timer interrupt process each time a reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit. Details of the timer interrupt processing will be described later.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing details of the initialization process (step S1000 in FIG. 55). In FIG. 56, the sub CPU 120a permits access to the sub RAM 120c (S1001). Next, the sub CPU 120a performs a mute control process (S1002). In the mute control process, the sub CPU 120a transmits a mute designation command for muting the output sound of the audio output device 32 to the image control board 150. When receiving the mute designation command, the image control board 150 sets the gain of the sound signal in the image control board 150 to zero.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a transmits the accessory return designation command to the lamp control board 140 (S1003). Upon receiving the accessory return designation command, the lamp control board 140 returns the frame effect drive device (frame gimmick) 33a and the board effect drive devices 33b and 33c (board surface gimmick) to their initial positions.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a transmits a background music designation command for outputting background music during startup to the image control board 150 (S1004). Upon receiving the background music designation command, the image control board 150 changes the gain of the sound signal in the image control board 150 from 0 to the value of the set volume during startup, and causes the audio output device 32 to output the background music during startup at this set volume. . The background music during start-up is BGM (Back Ground Music) played during the start-up of the gaming machine 1 (during the period from when the power is turned on to when the gaming machine becomes ready to play).

  Next, the sub CPU 120a transmits a display designation command for displaying the game standby image (color bar image) to the image control board 150 (S1005). Upon receiving this display designation command, the image control board 150 causes the image display device 31 to display a game standby image. As shown in FIG. 57, the game standby image is obtained by arranging rectangular images having different density colors.

  In FIG. 56, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the standby period has elapsed (S1006). If the standby period has not elapsed (S1006: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1007. If the standby period has elapsed (S1006: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1199.

  In step S1007, sub CPU 120a checks whether a power-on designation command has been received from main control board 110 or not. If the power-on designation command has been received (S1007: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1008. If the power-on designation command has not been received (S1007: No), the process proceeds to step S1009.

  In step S1008, the sub CPU 120a transmits to the image control board 150 a display designation command for causing the display image on the image display device 31 to display the characters "power on". Thereafter, the process returns to step S1006. As shown in FIG. 58, when the image control board 150 receives the display designation command, the image control board 150 displays the word “power on” in the upper right corner of the game standby image.

  In step S1009, sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not a RAM clear designation command has been received from main control board 110. When the sub CPU 120a receives the RAM clear designation command (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010. If the RAM clear designation command has not been received (S1009: No), the process proceeds to step S1011.

  In step S1010, the sub CPU 120a stores the initial value of the game state information (game state information of the low-probability game state and the non-time saving game state) in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process returns to step S1006.

  In step S1011, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the sub CPU 120a receives the power restoration specification command (S1011: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1012. If the power restoration specification command has not been received (S1011: No), the process proceeds to step S1014.

  In step S1012, the sub CPU 120a performs a game state setting process. In this game state setting process, when the command received from the main control board 110 is the power restoration 1 designation command, the sub CPU 120a stores the game state information of the low probability game state and the non-time saving game state in the game state of the sub RAM 120c. Store in the area. When the command received from the main control board 110 is the power restoration 2 designation command, the game state information of the low probability game state and the time saving game state is stored in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. When the command received from the main control board 110 is the power restoration 3 designation command, the game state information of the high-probability game state and the non-time saving game state is stored in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. When the command received from the main control board 110 is the power restoration 4 designation command, the game state information of the high probability game state and the time saving game state is stored in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a transmits to the image control board 150 a display designation command for causing the display image on the image display device 31 to display the characters "power recovery" (S1013). Thereafter, the process returns to step S1006. As shown in FIG. 59, when receiving the display designation command, the image control board 150 displays the text “power recovery” in the upper right corner of the game standby image.

  In step S1014, sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not a setting change command has been received from main control board 110. When receiving the setting change command (S1014: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1140. If the setting change command has not been received (S1014: No), the process proceeds to step S1015.

  In step S1140, sub CPU 120a performs a setting change notification image display control process. In the setting change notification image display control process, the sub CPU 120a changes the display image of the image display device 31 from the game standby image to the setting change notification image (FIG. 61), and the main control board 110 transmits the setting change notification image during display. When a command is received, processing according to the received command is performed. Details of the setting change notification image display control processing will be described later.

  In step S1015, sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not a setting confirmation command has been received from main control board 110. When receiving the setting confirmation command (S1015: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1150. If the setting confirmation command has not been received (S1015: No), the process returns to step S1006.

  In step S1150, sub CPU 120a performs a setting confirmation notification image display control process. In the setting confirmation notification image display control processing, the sub CPU 120a changes the display image of the image display device 31 from the game standby image to the setting confirmation notification image (FIG. 76), and the main control board 110 transmits the setting confirmation notification image. When a command is received, processing according to the received command is performed. The details of the setting confirmation notification image display control process will be described later.

  In step S1199, the sub CPU 120a performs a customer waiting state transition process. In the customer waiting state transition process, the sub CPU 120a causes the image display device 31 to display an image in the customer waiting state (an image having the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the stopped state). Stop output of background music during startup. Thereafter, the game of the gaming machine 1 becomes possible.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing details of the setting change notification image display control process (step S1140 in FIG. 56). In the setting change notification image display control process, the sub CPU 120a executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 60 every 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse in the reset clock pulse generator in the effect control board 120. .

  The sub CPU 120a checks whether the setting change mode flag is set in the setting change mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1141). The setting change mode flag is a flag indicating that the apparatus is operating in the setting change mode. If the setting change mode flag has not been set (S1141: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1142. If the setting change mode flag has been set (S1142: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1144.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a sets a display designation command of the setting change notification image in the transmission buffer (S1142). This display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output processing of step S1148. Upon receiving the display designation command, the image control board 150 causes the image display device 31 to display a setting change notification image. As shown in FIG. 61, the setting change notification image is obtained by arranging the text “Setting is being changed” in the center of the screen.

  In the next step S1143, the sub CPU 120a sets a setting change mode flag in the setting change mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1144.

  In step S1144, the sub CPU 120a checks whether or not there is a command received from the main control board 110 in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c. When there is a command in the reception buffer (S1144: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1145. If there is no command in the reception buffer (S1144: No), the process proceeds to step S1148.

  In step S1145, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a special command (a command described as “special command” in FIG. 28). If the command in the reception buffer is a special command (S1145: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1146. If the command in the reception buffer is a game command (S1145: No), the process proceeds to step S1147.

  In step S1146, the sub CPU 120a performs a special command analysis process during setting change. The special command analysis process during setting change is a process of analyzing a special command in the reception buffer, generating a command according to the analysis result, and setting the generated command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. In step S1147, the sub CPU 120a performs a setting change in-game command analysis process. The game command analysis process during setting change is a process of analyzing a game command in the reception buffer, generating a command according to the analysis result, and setting the generated command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the special command analysis processing during setting change and the game command analysis processing during setting change will be described later.

  In step S1148, the sub CPU 120a performs a data output process. In the data output process, when there is a command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, the sub CPU 120a transmits the command to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the details of the special command analysis process during setting change (step S1146 in FIG. 60). In step S1146-1 of FIG. 62, the sub CPU 120a performs a command execution mode determination process. In the command execution mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the execution mode of the command in the reception buffer based on the command execution mode determination table in the sub ROM 120b.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating the command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1146-1. In this table, data indicating each type of special command, data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed (“（” or “×”), and data indicating whether the setting change notification image needs to be erased after the command is received ("Erase" or "No Erase"), data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command when displaying the setting change notification image and the image corresponding to the command after receiving the command ("upper right" or " Center)) and data (“stopped” or “not stopped”) indicating whether the background music should be stopped after the command is received are stored. In the setting change mode, when a special command is received during the display of the setting change notification image in the setting change mode, the sub CPU 120a determines a command execution mode according to the table in FIG. 63, transmits a predetermined command to the image control board 150, and The content of one or both of the display image of the image display device 31 and the output sound of the audio output device 32 is changed on the substrate 150.

  The content of the record of each special command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 63 is such that when a special command is received while the setting change notification image is being displayed in the setting change mode, the setting change notification is performed regardless of whether background music is stopped. The display of the image is maintained.

  More specifically, in the record of the “full tank error command” in the table of FIG. 63, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “Δ”, and the data indicating the necessity of image erasure is “no erasure”. ", The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is" upper right ", and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is" no stop ". In the record of the “full tank error clearing command”, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “〇”, the data indicating necessity of erasing the image is “no erasing”, and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is indicated. The data indicated is "-" (the setting change notification image and the image corresponding to the command are not displayed together, so that no data is stored (similarly for other "-")). The data shown is "No stop".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 64, the image control board 150 displays the setting change notification image when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is a full tank error command. Maintain and display a message image corresponding to the full tank error command in the upper right corner of the screen. Further, in this case, the output of the background music is maintained during the start-up, and the message sound corresponding to the full tank error command is output. The image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the full tank error command and the message voice corresponding to the full tank error command when the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is the full tank error clearing command. Stop output of

  Here, the command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image, when an error occurs when the power of the main control board 110 is turned on, or when the main control board 110 is turned on. This may occur if an error occurs after powering on 110. In such a situation, a debugging dedicated board or a factory shipping board is connected to the effect control board 120 in place of the main control board 110, and the operation control board 120 (For example, a fluctuation start command for testing the behavior of the gaming machine 1 at the start of fluctuation, or a magnet detection error command for testing whether or not an illegal action can be reliably reported) is also transmitted. It can happen. In addition, it may occur when an inspection personal computer is connected to the external command interface of the effect control board 120 and a command for operation confirmation is transmitted from the inspection personal computer to the effect control board 120.

  In the record of the “door open error command” in the table of FIG. 63, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “Δ”, the data indicating whether the image is to be erased is “no erasure”, and the image corresponding to the command is displayed. The data indicating the display position is "center", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop". In the record of the “door open error clearing command”, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “〇”, the data indicating whether the image needs to be erased is “no erase”, and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is indicated. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop".

  Therefore, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 65, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is the door opening error command, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting change notification image. Then, a message image corresponding to the door opening error command is displayed in a manner superimposed on the text “setting is being changed” in the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during the startup is maintained, and the message sound corresponding to the door open error command is output. The image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the door open error command and outputs the message voice corresponding to the door open error command when the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is the door open error clearing command. To stop.

  In the record of the “magnet detection error command” in the table of FIG. 63, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “Δ”, the data indicating whether the image needs to be erased is “no erasure”, and the image corresponding to the command is Is "center", and data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is "stopped". In the record of the “magnet detection error elimination command”, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “〇”, the data indicating whether the image needs to be erased is “no erasure”, and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is indicated. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 66, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is a magnet detection error command, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting change notification image. Then, a message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command is superimposed and displayed on the character “Setting is being changed” in the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during the start is stopped, and the message voice corresponding to the magnet detection error command is output. The image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command and outputs the message voice corresponding to the magnet detection error command when the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is the magnet detection error clearing command. To stop.

  In the record of the “power-on designation command” in the table of FIG. 63, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “Δ”, the data indicating the necessity of erasure of the image is “no erasure”, and the image corresponding to the command is Is "upper right", and data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "stopped".

  Accordingly, for example, as shown in FIG. 67, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is the power-on designation command, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting change notification image. Then, a message image corresponding to the power-on designation command is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during startup is stopped.

  In the record of the “power restoration specification command” in the table of FIG. 63, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “Δ”, the data indicating whether the image is to be erased is “no erasure”, and the image corresponding to the command is Is "upper right", and data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "stopped".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 68, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image in the setting change mode is the power restoration specification command, the image control board 150 Is displayed and a message image corresponding to the power restoration designation command is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during startup is stopped.

  In step S1146-2 of FIG. 62, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the execution of the command in the reception buffer is “execute” based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination processing (if the command execution necessity data is "〇") is determined. If the execution necessity of the command in the reception buffer is “execute” (S1146-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1146-3. If it is “do not execute” (S1146-2: No), the special command analyzing process during the current setting change is ended.

  In step S1146-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the necessity of image erasure is "erased" or not based on the content of the command execution mode determination processing. When the necessity of image erasure is “erasure required” (S1146-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1146-4. If it is "no erasure" (S1146-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1146-5.

  In step S1146-4, the sub CPU 120a sets an erasure designation command for erasing the display image on the image display device 31 in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1146-7. The erase designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1148 in FIG. 60) after the special command analysis process during the current setting change. When receiving the deletion designation command, the image control board 150 deletes the setting change notification image of the image display device 31.

  Here, in step S1146-4, in place of the delete designation command for deleting the image, the display mode of the setting change notification image is changed so as not to hinder the view of the message image corresponding to the received command (specifically, , Reducing the size of the setting change notification image, moving the display position of the setting change notification image to a corner, increasing the transparency of the setting change notification image, and changing the display color of the setting change notification image. (Change) may be set. FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change in the content of image display of the image display device 31 according to a modification in which the display mode change finger command is set in step S1146-4. As shown in the example of FIG. 69, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image in the setting change mode is a magnet detection error command, the size of the setting change notification image The display mode of the image is changed, for example, is reduced and moved to the lower left corner, so that the display area of the image corresponding to the received command is opened in the center of the screen.

  In step S1146-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the necessity of stopping the background music is "stopped" based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination processing. If the need to stop the background music is “stopped” (S1146-5: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1146-6. If "no stop" (S1146-5: No), the process proceeds to step S1146-7.

  In step S1146-6, the sub CPU 120a sets a background music stop designation command for stopping background music in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1146-7. The background music stop designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1148 in FIG. 60) after the special command analysis process during the current setting change. When receiving the background music stop designation command, the image control board 150 stops outputting the background music.

  In step S1146-7, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, an operation designation command for causing the image control board 150 to perform a process corresponding to the command in the reception buffer. Specifically, if the command in the reception buffer is an error command, the command to be set in the transmission buffer is displayed as a message image corresponding to the error command (for example, if the command is a full tank error command, a “full tank error command” is displayed). ) And the output of a message voice (for example, in the case of a full tank error command, the output of a warning sound of “full tank error”). If the command in the reception buffer is an error elimination command, the command to be set in the transmission buffer is to designate the deletion of the displayed message image and the stop of the output message voice. The command set in the transmission buffer in step S1146-7 is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output processing (S1148 in FIG. 60) after the special command analysis processing during setting change this time. Upon receiving the command, the image control board 150 changes the display image of the image display device 31 and changes the output sound of the audio output device 32 according to the command.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing details of the game command analysis process during setting change (step S1147 in FIG. 60). In step S1147-1 in FIG. 70, the sub CPU 120a performs a command execution mode determination process. In the command execution mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the execution mode of the command in the reception buffer based on the command execution mode determination table in the sub ROM 120b.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1147-1. In this table, data indicating each type of game command, data indicating whether the command itself is required to be executed (“〇” or “×”), and data indicating whether the setting change notification image is required to be deleted after the command is received. ("Erase" or "No Erase"), data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command when displaying the setting change notification image and the image corresponding to the command after receiving the command ("upper right" or " Center)) and data (“stopped” or “not stopped”) indicating whether the background music should be stopped after the command is received are stored. In the setting change mode, when the sub CPU 120a receives a game command while the setting change notification image is being displayed, the sub CPU 120a determines a command execution mode according to the table in FIG. 71, transmits a predetermined command to the image control board 150, and performs image control. The content of one or both of the display image of the image display device 31 and the output sound of the audio output device 32 is changed on the substrate 150.

  The content of the record of each game command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 71 is such that when a game command is received while the setting change notification image is being displayed in the setting change mode, the setting change notification is performed regardless of whether the background music is stopped. The image is erased to make it invisible.

  More specifically, in the record of the “change start command” in the table of FIG. 71, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “Δ”, the data indicating the necessity of image erasure is “erased”, The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “−”, and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is “stopped”.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 72, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is the change start command, the image control board 150 displays the setting change notification image on the image display device 31. Is deleted, and a symbol variation image corresponding to the variation start command is displayed. In this case, the output of the background music during the start is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the fluctuation start command is output.

  In the record of the "start winning designation command" in the table of FIG. 71, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "x", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "erased", and the image corresponding to the command is displayed. Is "-", and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is the start winning designation command, the image control board 150 erases the setting change notification image, The display of the effect image corresponding to the start winning designation command is restricted. Further, in this case, the output of the background music during the startup is maintained, and the output of the effect sound corresponding to the start winning designation command is regulated.

  In the record of the “special game start command (opening designation command)” in the table of FIG. 71, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “Δ”, the data indicating whether the image is to be erased is “erased”, The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “−”, and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is “stopped”.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 74, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is a special game start command (opening designation command), the image display board 150 At 31, the setting change notification image is deleted, and an effect image corresponding to the special game start command (opening designation command) is displayed. In this case, the output of the background music during the start is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the special game start command (opening designation command) is output.

  In step S1147-2 of FIG. 70, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the execution of the command in the reception buffer is “execute” based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination processing (if the command execution necessity data is "〇") is determined. When the execution necessity of the command in the reception buffer is “execute” (S1147-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1147-3. If it is "not executed" (S1147-2: No), the game command analyzing process during the current setting change is ended.

  In step S1147-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the necessity of image erasure is "erased" or not based on the content of the command execution mode determination processing. When the necessity of image erasure is “erasure required” (S1147-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1147-4. If it is "no erasure" (S1147-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1147-5.

  In step S1147-4, the sub CPU 120a sets an erasure designation command for erasing the display image on the image display device 31 in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1147-7. The erase designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1148 in FIG. 60) after the game command analysis process during the current setting change. When receiving the deletion designation command, the image control board 150 deletes the setting change notification image of the image display device 31.

  Here, in step S1147-4, a display mode for instructing a change in the display mode of the setting change notification image so as not to obstruct the view of the message image corresponding to the received command, instead of the erasure designation command for erasing the image A change designation command may be set.

  In step S1147-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stop of the background music is “stopped” based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process. If the need to stop the background music is “stopped” (S1147-5: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1147-6. If "no stop" (S1147-5: No), the process proceeds to step S1147-7.

  In step S1147-6, the sub CPU 120a sets a background music stop designation command for stopping background music in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1147-7. The background music stop designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1148 in FIG. 60) after the game command analysis process during the current setting change. When receiving the background music stop designation command, the image control board 150 stops outputting the background music.

  In step S1147-7, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, an operation designation command for causing the image control board 150 to perform processing corresponding to the command in the reception buffer.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing details of the setting confirmation notification image display control process (step S1150 in FIG. 56). In the setting confirmation notification image display control process, the sub CPU 120a executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 75 every 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse in the reset clock pulse generator in the effect control board 120. .

  The sub CPU 120a checks whether the setting check mode flag is set in the setting check mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1151). The setting check mode flag is a flag indicating that the operation is in the setting check mode. If the setting confirmation mode flag has not been set (S1151: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1152. If the setting confirmation mode flag has been set (S1152: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1154.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a sets the display designation command of the setting confirmation notification image in the transmission buffer (S1152). This display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output processing of step S1158. When receiving the display designation command, the image control board 150 causes the image display device 31 to display a setting confirmation notification image. As shown in FIG. 76, the setting confirmation notification image has a text “setting is being confirmed” arranged in the center of the screen.

  In the next step S1153, the sub CPU 120a sets a setting confirmation mode flag in the setting confirmation mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1154.

  In step S1154, the sub CPU 120a checks whether or not there is a command received from the main control board 110 in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c. When there is a command in the reception buffer (S1154: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1155. If there is no command in the reception buffer (S1154: No), the process proceeds to step S1158.

  In step S1155, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a special command (a command described as “special command” in FIG. 28). If the command in the reception buffer is a special command (S1155: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1156. If the command in the reception buffer is a game command (S1155: No), the process proceeds to step S1157.

  In step S1156, the sub CPU 120a performs special command analysis processing during setting confirmation. The special command analysis process during setting confirmation is a process of analyzing a special command in the reception buffer, generating a command according to the analysis result, and setting the generated command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. In step S1157, the sub CPU 120a performs a setting confirmation game command analysis process. The game command analysis processing during setting confirmation analyzes the game command in the reception buffer, generates a command according to the analysis result, and sets the generated command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the special command analysis processing during setting confirmation and the game command analysis processing during setting confirmation will be described later.

  In step S1158, the sub CPU 120a performs a data output process. In the data output process, when there is a command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, the sub CPU 120a transmits the command to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating the details of the special command analysis process during setting confirmation (step S1156 in FIG. 75). In step S1156-1 of FIG. 77, the sub CPU 120a performs a command execution mode determination process. In the command execution mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the execution mode of the command in the reception buffer based on the command execution mode determination table in the sub ROM 120b.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating the command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1156-1. In this table, data indicating each type of special command, data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed (“（” or “×”), and data indicating whether the setting confirmation notification image needs to be erased after receiving the command. (“Erase” or “No Erase”), data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command when the setting confirmation notification image and the image corresponding to the command are displayed together after receiving the command (“upper right” or “ Center)) and data (“stopped” or “not stopped”) indicating whether the background music should be stopped after the command is received are stored. In the setting confirmation mode, when the special command is received during the display of the setting confirmation notification image in the setting confirmation mode, the sub CPU 120a determines the command execution mode according to the table in FIG. 78, transmits the predetermined command to the image control board 150, and The content of one or both of the display image of the image display device 31 and the output sound of the audio output device 32 is changed on the substrate 150.

  The content of the record of each special command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 78 is such that when a special command is received while the setting confirmation notification image is being displayed in the setting confirmation mode, whether the background music is stopped or not is notified. The display of the image is maintained.

  More specifically, in the record of the “full tank error command” in the table of FIG. 78, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “Δ”, and the data indicating the necessity of image erasure is “no erasure”. ", The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is" upper right ", and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is" no stop ". In the record of the “full tank error clearing command”, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “〇”, the data indicating necessity of erasing the image is “no erasing”, and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is indicated. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 79, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is a full tank error command, the image control board 150 displays the setting confirmation notification image. Maintain and display a message image corresponding to the full tank error command in the upper right corner of the screen. Further, in this case, the output of the background music is maintained during the start-up, and the message sound corresponding to the full tank error command is output. The image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the full tank error command and the message voice corresponding to the full tank error command when the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is the full tank error clearing command. Stop output of

  In the record of the “door open error command” in the table of FIG. 78, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “Δ”, the data indicating the necessity of image deletion is “no deletion”, and the image corresponding to the command is The data indicating the display position is "center", and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop". In the record of the “door open error clearing command”, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “〇”, the data indicating whether the image needs to be erased is “no erase”, and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is indicated. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 80, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting confirmation notification image when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is a door opening error command. Then, a message image corresponding to the door open error command is superimposed and displayed on the text of “Setting is being confirmed” in the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during the startup is maintained, and the message sound corresponding to the door open error command is output. The image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the door open error command and outputs the message voice corresponding to the door open error command when the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is the door open error clearing command. To stop.

  In the record of the “magnet detection error command” in the table of FIG. 78, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “Δ”, the data indicating whether the image is to be erased is “no erasure”, and the image corresponding to the command is Is "center", and data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is "stopped". In the record of the “magnet detection error elimination command”, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “〇”, the data indicating whether the image needs to be erased is “no erasure”, and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is indicated. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 81, if the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is a magnet detection error command, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting confirmation notification image. Then, a message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command is superimposed and displayed on the text of “Setting is being confirmed” in the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during the start is stopped, and the message voice corresponding to the magnet detection error command is output. The image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command and outputs the message voice corresponding to the magnet detection error command when the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is the magnet detection error clearing command. To stop.

  In the record of the “power-on designation command” in the table of FIG. 78, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “Δ”, the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is “no erasure”, and the image corresponding to the command is Is "upper right", and data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "stopped".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 82, when the command received during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is the power-on designation command, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting confirmation notification image, and Displays a message image corresponding to the power-on designation command. In this case, the output of the background music during startup is stopped.

  In the record of the “power restoration specification command” in the table of FIG. 78, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “Δ”, the data indicating whether the image is to be erased is “no erasure”, and the image corresponding to the command is Is "upper right", and data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "stopped".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 83, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is the power restoration designation command, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting confirmation notification image. Then, a power restoration designation command and a corresponding message image are displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during startup is stopped.

  In step S1156-2 of FIG. 77, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the execution of the command in the reception buffer is “execute” based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination processing (if the data of the command execution necessity is "〇") is determined. If the execution necessity of the command in the reception buffer is “execute” (S1156-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1156-3. If it is “do not execute” (S1156-2: No), the special command analyzing process during the current setting check is ended.

  In step S1156-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the necessity of image erasure is “erased” or not based on the content of the command execution mode determination processing. When the necessity of image erasure is “erasure required” (S1156-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1156-4. If it is "no erasure" (S1156-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1156-5.

  In step S1156-4, sub CPU 120a sets an erasure designation command for erasing the display image on image display device 31 in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1156-7. The erase designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1158 in FIG. 75) after the special command analysis process during the current setting confirmation. When receiving the deletion designation command, the image control board 150 deletes the setting confirmation notification image of the image display device 31.

  Here, in step S1156-4, a display mode change for instructing a change of the display mode of the game standby image so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the message image corresponding to the received command, instead of the erasure designation command for erasing the image. The specified command may be set.

  In step S1156-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stop of the background music is “stopped” based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process. When the necessity of stopping the background music is “stopped” (S1156-5: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1156-6. If "no stop" (S1156-5: No), the process proceeds to step S1156-7.

  In step S1156-6, the sub CPU 120a sets a background music stop designation command for stopping background music in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1156-7. The background music stop designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output processing (S1158 in FIG. 75) after the special command analysis processing during the current setting confirmation. When receiving the background music stop designation command, the image control board 150 stops outputting the background music.

  In step S1156-7, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, an operation designation command for causing the image control board 150 to perform processing corresponding to the command in the reception buffer.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing details of the game command analysis processing during setting confirmation (step S1157 in FIG. 75). In step S1157-1 in FIG. 84, the sub CPU 120a performs a command execution mode determination process. In the command execution mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the execution mode of the command in the reception buffer based on the command execution mode determination table in the sub ROM 120b.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating the command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1157-1. In this table, data indicating each type of game command, data indicating whether or not the command itself needs to be executed (“〇” or “×”), and data indicating whether or not the setting confirmation notification image after the command is received is required (“Erase” or “No Erase”), data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command when the setting confirmation notification image and the image corresponding to the command are displayed together after receiving the command (“upper right” or “ Center)) and data (“stopped” or “not stopped”) indicating whether the background music should be stopped after the command is received are stored. In the setting confirmation mode, when the game command is received during the display of the setting confirmation notification image in the setting confirmation mode, the sub CPU 120a determines the command execution mode according to the table in FIG. 85, transmits the predetermined command to the image control board 150, and The content of one or both of the display image of the image display device 31 and the output sound of the audio output device 32 is changed on the substrate 150.

  The contents of the record of each game command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 85 are the same as those in the case where the game command is received while the setting confirmation notification image is being displayed in the setting confirmation mode, regardless of whether the background music is stopped. The image is erased to make it invisible.

  More specifically, in the record of the “variation start command” in the table of FIG. 85, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “〇”, the data indicating whether the image is to be erased is “erased”, The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “−”, and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is “stopped”.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 86, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is a change start command, the image control board 150 Is deleted, and a symbol variation image corresponding to the variation start command is displayed. In this case, the output of the background music during the start is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the fluctuation start command is output.

  In the record of the "start winning designation command" in the table of FIG. 85, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is "x", the data indicating whether the image needs to be erased is "erased", and the image corresponding to the command is displayed. Is "-", and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 87, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is the start winning designation command, the image control board 150 erases the setting confirmation notification image, The display of the effect image corresponding to the start winning designation command is restricted. Further, in this case, the output of the background music during the startup is maintained, and the output of the effect sound corresponding to the start winning designation command is regulated.

  In the record of the “special game start command (opening designation command)” in the table of FIG. 85, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “Δ”, the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is “erased”, The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “−”, and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is “stopped”.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 88, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is a special game start command (opening designation command), the image display board 150 At 31, the setting confirmation notification image is deleted, and an effect image corresponding to the special game start command (opening designation command) is displayed. In this case, the output of the background music during the start is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the special game start command (opening designation command) is output.

  In step S1157-2 of FIG. 84, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the execution of the command in the reception buffer is “execute” based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination processing (the data of the command execution necessity is "〇") is determined. When the execution of the command in the reception buffer is “execute” (S1157-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1157-3. If it is "not executed" (S1157-2: No), the game command analyzing process during the current setting check is ended.

  In step S1157-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the necessity of image erasure is “erased” or not based on the content of the command execution mode determination processing. If the necessity of image erasure is “erasure required” (S1147-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1157-4. If it is "no erasure" (S1147-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1157-5.

  In step S1157-4, the sub CPU 120a sets an erasure designation command for erasing the display image on the image display device 31 in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1157-7. The erase designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1158 in FIG. 75) after the game command analysis process during the current setting confirmation. When receiving the deletion designation command, the image control board 150 deletes the setting confirmation notification image of the image display device 31.

  Here, in step S1157-4, a display mode for instructing a change in the display mode of the setting confirmation notification image for not obstructing the view of the message image corresponding to the received command, instead of the deletion designation command for deleting the image. A change designation command may be set.

  In step S1157-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stop of the background music is “stopped” based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process. When the need to stop the background music is “stopped” (S1157-5: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1157-6. If "no stop" (S1157-5: No), the process proceeds to step S1157-7.

  In step S1157-6, the sub CPU 120a sets a background music stop designation command for stopping background music in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1157-7. The background music stop designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1158 in FIG. 75) after the game command analyzing process during the current setting confirmation. When receiving the background music stop designation command, the image control board 150 stops outputting the background music.

  In step S1157-7, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, an operation designation command for causing the image control board 150 to perform a process corresponding to the command in the reception buffer.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the effect control board 120. After the initialization processing is completed and the game is enabled, the sub CPU 120a of the effect control board 120 is shown in FIG. 89 every 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse generator in the effect control board 120. Execute a series of processing.

  In FIG. 89, the sub CPU 120a saves information in the register of the sub CPU 120a to the stack area (S1400).

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs a timer update process (S1500). In the timer update process, the sub CPU 120a updates various counters by -1 based on the time signal input from the RTC 120d. Details of the timer updating process will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs a command analysis process (S1600). In the command analysis process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes a command in the reception buffer, and based on the analysis result, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device. Then, the content of the effect by the effector 34 is determined, and a command indicating the content of the determined effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. Details of the command analysis processing will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs an effect input control process (S1700). In the effect input control process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process according to input signals of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the detection switches 35a, 39a, 39b, 39c, 39d, and 39e of the center key 39E. The details of the effect input control process will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs a data output process (S1800). In the data output processing, the sub CPU 120a transmits the command stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c in the command analysis processing in step S1600 and the effect input control processing in step S1700 to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a restores the information saved in the stack area in step S1400 to the register of the sub CPU 120a (S1900).

  FIGS. 90, 91, 92, and 93 are flowcharts showing the details of the command analysis processing (step S1600 in FIG. 89). In FIG. 90, the sub CPU 120a checks whether or not there is a command received from the main control board 110 in the reception buffer (S1601). If there is a command in the reception buffer (S1601: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1610. If there is no command in the reception buffer (S1601: No), the current command analysis processing ends.

  In step S1610, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a special symbol reservation number designation command. When the command in the reception buffer is the special symbol reservation number designation command (S1610: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1611. If the command in the reception buffer is not the special symbol reservation number designation command (S1610: No), the process proceeds to step 1620.

  In step S1611, the sub CPU 120a performs a special symbol reservation number update process. In the special symbol hold number update process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the special symbol hold number designation command, determines the number of hold display images 37 to be displayed on the image display device 31, and determines the number of hold display images 37 to be displayed. The corresponding special figure display number designation command is set in the transmission buffer.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the special symbol reservation number update processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 display effects relating to the appearance or erasure of the hold display image 37 in the image display device 31 on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive device 33a. , 33b, 33c, and the lighting device 34 for production.

  In step S1620, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a start winning designation command. When the command in the receiving buffer is the start winning designation command (S1620: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1621. If the command in the reception buffer is not the start winning designation command (S1620: No), the process proceeds to step S1630.

  In step S1621, the sub CPU 120a performs a start winning designation command storage process. In the start prize designation command storage process, the sub CPU 120a selects the one corresponding to the start prize designation command in the reception buffer from the first effect information storage area and the second effect information storage area of the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 120c. In the first to fourth storage units of the selected effect information storage area, the storage unit having no data and the smallest number is set as the data storage destination, and the start winning designation command in the reception buffer is stored as the data storage destination storage unit. To memorize.

  FIG. 38 (c) is a diagram showing an effect information storage area. As shown in FIG. 38 (c), the effect information storage area includes the 0th storage unit corresponding to the change, the first effect information storage area corresponding to the suspension of the first special symbol, and the suspension of the second special symbol. It has a corresponding second effect information storage area. Each of the first effect information storage area and the second effect information storage area includes a first storage unit corresponding to the first reservation, a second storage unit corresponding to the second reservation, a third storage unit corresponding to the third reservation, And a fourth storage unit corresponding to the fourth hold. As shown in FIG. 38 (d), each storage unit in the effect information storage area can store a start winning designation command, a look-ahead effect effect scenario data, and stage data of a new stage after a change in a stage change. Has become.

  In FIG. 90, after execution of step S1621, the sub CPU 120a performs prefetch effect effect selection processing (S1622). In the look-ahead effect effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a sets the start winning appointment designation command stored in the effect information storage area in step S1621 as a final look-ahead effect effect with the change of the symbol corresponding to the start winning appointment designation command (FIG. 22). In the case of executing the prefetch effect effect, the prefetch effect effect scenario up to the final change is determined, and the prefetch effect effect scenario data indicating this scenario is stored in the effect information storage area. In the storage unit. The details of the prefetch effect effect selection process will be described later.

  After the execution of step S1622, the sub CPU 120a performs a stage change determination process (S1622). In the stage change determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the stage change, and when performing the stage change, determines which of the fluctuation and the fluctuation in the suspension at the time of the start winning prize to perform the stage change. A decision is made and a preparation process for performing a stage change at the decided fluctuation is performed. The details of the stage change determination process will be described later.

  In step S1624, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the stage change determination process is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1624: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1625. When the result of the determination is “do not execute” (S1624: No), the current command analysis processing ends.

  In step S1625, sub CPU 120a performs a stage change announcement effect selection process. In the stage change announcement effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the stage change announcement effect, and when performing the stage change announcement effect, performs the stage change announcement effect at any timing before the stage change. Is determined, and a preparation process for executing the stage change announcement effect is performed at the determined timing. The details of the stage change determination process will be described later.

  In step S1630, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a symbol designation command. When the command in the reception buffer is a symbol designating command (S1630: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1631. If the command in the reception buffer is not a symbol designating command (S1630: No), the process proceeds to step S1640.

  In step S1631, the sub CPU 120a performs the effect symbol determination process, and ends the current command analysis process after executing the effect symbol determination process. In the effect symbol determination process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the symbol designation command, determines the stop symbol number of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z, and determines the determined stop symbol number as the sub symbol. A stop symbol designation command is stored in the effect symbol storage area in the RAM 120c to notify the stop symbol number to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140, and the generated stop symbol designation command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the effect symbol determination process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the effect symbol determination processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 determine a symbol combination at the time of stopping the fluctuation in the fluctuation.

  In step S1640, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a fluctuation start command. When the command in the reception buffer is the change start command (S1640: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1641. If the command in the reception buffer is not the change start command (S1640: No), the process proceeds to step S1670.

  In step S1641, the sub CPU 120a performs a storage area shift process. In the storage area shift process, when data is stored in one or more of the first to fourth storage units of the second effect information storage area, the sub CPU 120a stores the second to fourth storage areas of the second effect information storage area. The data in the unit is shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit of the second effect information storage area is written to the 0th storage unit. By writing the data in the 0th storage unit, the data (start winning designation command, prefetch effect effect scenario data, stage data) stored in the 0th storage unit up to that point are erased. When data is not stored in the second effect information storage area and data is stored in one or more of the first to fourth storage units of the first effect information storage area, The data in the second to fourth storage units is shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit in the first effect information storage area is written to the zero storage unit. By writing the data in the 0th storage unit, the data stored in the 0th storage unit up to that point is erased.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the prefetch effect effect scenario data is stored in the effect information storage area (S1642). If the prefetch effect effect scenario data is stored in the effect information storage area (S1642: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1643. When the pre-read effect effect scenario data is not stored in the effect information storage area (S1642: No), the process proceeds to step S1646.

  In step S1643, the sub CPU 120a performs a prefetch effect control process. In the look-ahead effect control process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the look-ahead effect effect scenario data in the effect information storage area, determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect effect in the variation, and executes the look-ahead effect effect in the variation. Generates an effect pattern designating command for a look-ahead effect effect, and sets the generated effect pattern designating command in the transmission buffer.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the prefetch effect control processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the effect pattern designation command of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead effect effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect. The lighting device 34 is caused to execute the process.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not stage data is stored in the effect information storage area (S1644). When the stage data is stored in the effect information storage area (S1644: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1645. When the stage data is not stored in the 0th storage unit of the effect information storage area (S1644: No), the process proceeds to step S1646.

  In step S1645, the sub CPU 120a performs a stage change control process. In the stage change control process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the stage data in the effect information storage area, and performs the stage change in the fluctuation when the stage data is stored in the 0th storage unit of the effect information storage area. Is determined, and an effect pattern specifying command for instructing a stage change to the stage indicated by the stage data in the 0th storage unit is generated, and this effect pattern specifying command is set in the transmission buffer.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the stage change control processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the stage change effect pattern designation command, the image control device 150, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect are displayed in accordance with the command. The lighting device 34 for use.

  In step S1646, sub CPU 120a performs a variable effect pattern determination process. The variation effect pattern determination process is a process of determining a design variation effect pattern which is a flow of an effect relating to the behavior of the effect symbol 36 and the movable auditors 330a, 330b, 330c in the variation. In the variable effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 1 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the variation effect pattern determination table in the sub ROM 120b, determines the symbol variation effect pattern based on the combination of the variation start command and the effect random number 1 in the reception buffer, and determines the determined symbol variation effect pattern. Is stored in the symbol variation effect pattern storage area in the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specifying command of the determined symbol variation effect pattern, and sets the generated effect pattern specifying command in the transmission buffer.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a fluctuation effect pattern determination table. In the variation effect pattern determination table, a set of the effect random number 1, a symbol variation effect pattern, and an effect pattern designation command is stored for each of the items corresponding to the variation start command.

  For example, the options of the symbol variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation start command (16R probability variation, variation time T1) with MODE data “E6H” and DATA data “11H” include the symbol variation effect pattern 111 and the symbol variation effect pattern. 112, a symbol variation effect pattern 113, a symbol variation effect pattern 114, and the like. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 111 is a line operation effect → a loss reach effect (a series of effects of a reach effect → a temporary stop in a loss mode) → SP reach effect → a big hit notification effect (per 16R). The flow of the effect of the symbol fluctuation effect pattern 112 is as follows: dialogue operation effect → loss effect reach effect → battle effect (successful battle) → big hit notification effect (per 16R). The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 13 is as follows: loss-reach effect → battle effect (battle failure) → surprise operation effect → big hit notification effect (per 16R). The flow of the effect of the symbol fluctuation effect pattern 14 is: loss-reach effect → SP reach effect → temporary stop effect in a hit mode → re-lottery effect → big hit notification effect (16R).

  The options of the symbol variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation start command (16R probability variation, variation time T2) with MODE data “E6H” and DATA data “12H” include a symbol variation effect pattern 121, a symbol variation effect pattern 122, There is a symbol fluctuation effect pattern 123 and the like. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 121 is: line operation effect → loss reach effect → SP reach effect → SPSP reach effect → big hit notification effect (per 16R). The flow of the effect of the symbol fluctuation effect pattern 122 is a line operation effect → a loser reach effect → an SP reach effect → a SPSP reach effect → an effect of temporarily stopping in a hit mode → a re-lottery effect → a large hit information effect (16R per). . The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 123 is: loss reach effect → SP reach effect → SPSP reach effect → serif operation effect → temporary stop effect in a hit mode → re-lottery effect → big hit notification effect (16R per) .

  The symbol variation effect pattern options corresponding to the variation start command (2R probability variation, variation time T3) with MODE data “E6H” and DATA data “41H” include a symbol variation effect pattern 141. The flow of the production of the pattern fluctuation production pattern 141 is as follows: losing reach production → dark turn production → second movable role tilting production → challenge range production → first movable role descent production → challenge successful production → big hit notification production (per 2R) Has become.

  The options of the symbol variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation start command (losing, variation time T1) with MODE data “E6H” and DATA data “01H” include a symbol variation effect pattern 011 and a symbol variation effect pattern 012. . The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 011 is: line operation effect → losing reach effect → SP reach effect → losing notification effect. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 012 is as follows: line operation effect → losing reach effect → battle effect (battle failure) → loss information effect.

  A symbol variation effect pattern option corresponding to the variation start command (loss, variation time T3) with MODE data “E6H” and DATA data “03H” includes a symbol variation effect pattern 014. The flow of the effect of the pattern fluctuation effect pattern 014 is: loss reach effect → dark turn effect → second movable object tilting effect → challenge effect → chance range failure effect → loss information effect.

  The symbol variation effect pattern options corresponding to the variation start command (loss, variation time T10 (short variation)) with MODE data “E6H” and DATA data “10H” include a symbol variation effect pattern 017. The effect flow of the symbol variation effect pattern 017 is “short variation effect → loss information effect”.

  Here, among the symbol variation effect patterns in the variation effect pattern determination table (FIG. 94), those that execute a line operation effect immediately after the symbol variation starts (the symbol variation effect patterns 111, 112, 121, 122, 011). , 012, etc.) and those that execute a line operation effect after the reach is established (symbol variation effect patterns 114, 123, etc.). With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 enables the execution of the line operation effect immediately after the start of the change of the symbol, and also enables the execution of the line operation effect after the reach is established.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the variable effect pattern determination processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform a series of effects according to the command from the start to the end of the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect. Drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c and effect lighting device 34.

  In step S1647 of FIG. 91, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process includes an SP reach effect. When including the SP reach effect (S1647: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1648. When the SP reach effect is not included (S1647: No), the process proceeds to step S1649.

  In step S1648, sub CPU 120a performs an SP-specific announcement effect selection process. In the SP-specific announcement effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the SP-specific announcement effect (FIG. 13C), and determines the execution timing of the SP-specific announcement effect when executing the SP-specific announcement effect. Then, an effect pattern specifying command for instructing execution of the SP specific notice effect at this timing is generated, and the generated effect pattern specifying command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the SP specific notice effect selection process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the SP specific announcement effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 display the SP specific notice effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device according to the command. 34.

  In step S1649, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process includes the SPSP reach effect. When including the SPSP reach effect (S1649: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1650. When the SPSP reach effect is not included (S1649: No), the process proceeds to step S1651.

  In step S1650, sub CPU 120a performs a SPSP specific notice effect selection process. In the SPSP-specific announcement effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the SPSP-specific announcement effect (FIG. 13D), and determines the execution timing of the SPSP-specific announcement effect when executing the SPSP-specific announcement effect. Then, an effect pattern specifying command for instructing the execution of the SPSP specific notice effect at this timing is generated, and the generated effect pattern specifying command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the SPSP specific announcement effect selection process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the SPSP specific announcement effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the SPSP specific notice effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device according to the command. 34.

  In step S1651, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process includes a line operation effect. If the sub CPU 120a includes a speech operation effect (S1651: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1652. When the line operation effect is not included (S1651: No), the process proceeds to step S1656.

  In step S1652, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue operation effect operation result determination process. In the dialogue operation effect operation result determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the dialogue speaker and the dialogue which are the operation results of the dialogue operation effect, generates a speech operation effect effect pattern designation command according to the determination, and generates the generated effect pattern designation. Set the command in the transmission buffer. The details of the dialog operation effect operation result determination process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the dialog operation effect operation result determination processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800.

  In step S1653, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time of the operation acceptance effective period of the dialog operation effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, to obtain a value of the dialog in the sub RAM 120c. It is set in the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the operation effect. Further, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time of the operation acceptance valid period of the speech operation effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to obtain a value of the operation acceptance effective period end timer counter for the speech operation effect in the sub RAM 120c. Set to. The operation reception valid period start timer counter and the operation reception valid period end timer counter are decremented each time the timer updating process in step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception valid period, and the operation reception valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the end time of the operation reception valid period.

  In step S1654, the sub CPU 120a sets a dialog operation effect operation result standby flag in the dialog operation effect operation result standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1655. The serif operation effect operation result standby flag is a flag indicating that the effect in the serif operation effect is waiting to be executed.

  In step S1655, sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue operation specific advance notice effect selection process. In the serif operation specific notice effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the serif operation specific notice effect (FIG. 16 (d)), and executes the serif operation specific notice effect when executing the serif operation specific notice effect. Is determined, an effect pattern specifying command instructing execution of the effect at this timing is generated, and the generated effect pattern specifying command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the speech operation specific notice effect selection process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the dialog operation effect operation result determination processing and the dialog operation specific notice effect effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, And the lighting device for production 34 is executed.

  In step S1656, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process includes a challenge effect. When including the challenge effect (S1656: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1657. If a challenge effect is not included (S1656: No), the process proceeds to step S1661.

  In step S1657, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the challenge effect is a challenge failure or a challenge success. When the challenge effect is such that the challenge effect is successful (S1657: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1658. When the challenge effect is such that the challenge fails (S1657: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1661.

  In step S1658, sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time of the operation acceptance validity period of the challenge effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, to obtain the challenge effect of sub RAM 120c. To the operation reception valid period start timer counter for The sub CPU 120a calculates the remaining time until the end time of the operation acceptance valid period of the challenge effect, and sets a value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds in the operation acceptance effective period end timer counter for the challenge effect in the sub RAM 120c. I do. The operation reception valid period start timer counter and the operation reception valid period end timer counter are decremented each time the timer updating process in step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception valid period, and the operation reception valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the end time of the operation reception valid period.

  In step S1659, the sub CPU 120a sets a challenge effect (success) standby flag in the challenge effect (success) standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1660. The challenge effect (success) wait flag is a flag indicating that the execution of the challenge success effect is waiting.

  In step S1660, sub CPU 120a sets the first accessory descent standby flag in the first accessory descent standby flag storage area of sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1661. The first operation effect wait flag is a flag indicating that the first movable auditorium 330a is waiting to execute an effect of descending.

  In step S1661, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process includes a surprise operation effect. When the surprise operation effect is included (S1661: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1662. When the surprise operation effect is not included (S1661: No), the process proceeds to step S1665.

  In step S1662, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time of the operation acceptance effective period of the surprise operation effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, to calculate the value of the surprise in the sub RAM 120c. It is set in the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the operation effect. Also, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time of the operation acceptance valid period of the surprise operation effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to calculate the operation acceptance effective period end timer counter for the surprise operation effect in the sub RAM 120c. Set to. The operation reception valid period start timer counter and the operation reception valid period end timer counter are decremented each time the timer updating process in step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception valid period, and the operation reception valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the end time of the operation reception valid period.

  In step S1663, the sub CPU 120a sets a surprise operation effect standby flag in the surprise operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1664. The surprise operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the operation is in a standby state for executing the surprise operation effect.

  In step S1664, the sub CPU 120a sets the first accessory descent standby flag in the first accessory descent standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1665.

  In step S1665 in FIG. 92, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process includes a shortened variation effect. When including the shortened fluctuation effect (S1665: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1666. If the reduced fluctuation effect is not included (S1665: No), the process proceeds to step S1667.

  In step S1666, sub CPU 120a performs a shortened fluctuation announcement effect selection process. In the shortened fluctuation announcement effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the shortened fluctuation announcement effect (FIG. 19B), and when executing the shortened fluctuation announcement effect, sets the execution timing of the shortened fluctuation announcement effect. Then, an effect pattern specifying command for instructing execution of the effect at this timing is generated, and the generated effect pattern specifying command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the shortened fluctuation announcement effect selection process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the shortened fluctuation announcement effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 display the shortened fluctuation announcement effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device according to the command. 34.

  In step S1668, sub CPU 120a performs a mode effect control process. In the mode effect control process, if the special training mode effect is being executed, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to end the special training mode in the fluctuation, and if the special training mode effect is to be ended, the sub CPU 120a performs the special training mode end effect. An effect pattern specification command is generated, and the generated effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the mode effect control processing will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the mode effect control processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140, in accordance with the command, display the corresponding effect on the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34. To run.

  In step S1669, the sub CPU 120a performs a stage change announcement effect control process during the symbol change. In the symbol change stage change announcement effect control process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the stage change announcement effect is to be executed immediately after the start or immediately before the stop of the current change display. When the stage change announcement effect is to be executed immediately after the start of the fluctuation display, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command for the stage change announcement effect, and sets the generated effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer. . If the stage change notice effect is to be executed immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the timing immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. It is set in the timer counter immediately before the stop of the fluctuation in the sub RAM 120c. The timer counter immediately before the stop of the fluctuation is counted down every time the timer updating process is executed in step S1500, and becomes 0 at the timing immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the symbol change stage change announcement effect control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 display a stage change announcement effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device according to the command. 34.

  In step S1670 of FIG. 93, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a fluctuation stop command. When the command in the reception buffer is the fluctuation stop command (S1670: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1671. If the command in the reception buffer is not the fluctuation stop command (S1670: No), the process proceeds to step S1680.

  In step S1671, the sub CPU 120a performs an effect symbol stop process. In the effect design stop processing, the sub CPU 120a generates a stop designation command for stopping the effect design 36, and sets the generated stop designation command in the transmission buffer. The details of the effect symbol stop processing will be described later.

  The stop designation command set in the transmission buffer in the effect symbol stop processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect related to the stop of the effect symbol 36 are received according to the command. The effect lighting device 34 is executed.

  In step S1672, the sub CPU 120a performs a stage change notice effect production control process during the symbol stop. In the symbol change stage change announcement effect control process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stage change is to be performed immediately after the stop of the current fluctuation display. When the stage change is to be performed immediately after the stoppage of the fluctuation display, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designating command for a stage change announcement effect, and sets the generated effect pattern designating command in the transmission buffer.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the symbol change stage change announcement effect control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 display a stage change announcement effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device according to the command. 34.

  In step S1680, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a game state designation command. When the command in the reception buffer is the gaming state designation command (S1680: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1681. If the command in the reception buffer is not a game state designation command (S1680: No), the process proceeds to step S1690.

  In step S1681, the sub CPU 120a performs a game state setting process. In the game state setting process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the game state designation command in the reception buffer, obtains the current game state, and stores the game state information indicating the obtained game state in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. .

  In step S1690, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an opening designation command. When the command in the reception buffer is the opening designation command (S1690: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1691. If the command in the reception buffer is not the opening designation command (S1690: No), the process proceeds to step S1692.

  In step S1691, the sub CPU 120a performs a special game effect selection process. In the special game effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines an opening effect pattern based on the opening designation command in the reception buffer, and stores information of the determined opening effect pattern in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c. In addition, when the opening designation command is an 8R probability change or 8R normal hit, the sub CPU 120a executes a rank-up effect (FIGS. 21A and 21B) in the fourth round, The rank-up effect execution data indicating the contents of the rank-up effect is stored in the effect information storage area for each round of the fourth round of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the special game effect selection process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the special game effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, according to the command, the opening effect of the special game is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting. The program is executed by the device 34.

  In step S1692, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a round start command. When the command in the reception buffer is the round start command (S1692: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to Step S1693. If the command in the reception buffer is not the round start command (S1692: No), the process proceeds to step S1694.

  In step S1693, the sub CPU 120a performs a round effect control process. In the round effect control process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the round start command in the reception buffer, and determines whether or not the current round is the execution round of the rank-up effect (per 4R per 8R probability change or 8R normal). Is determined. The sub CPU 120a determines an effect pattern of the current round based on the determination result, stores information of the determined effect pattern in an effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c, and generates an effect pattern designation command of the effect pattern. Then, the generated effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the round effect control process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the round effect control processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, according to the command, the special game round effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting. The program is executed by the device 34.

  In step S1694, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an ending designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is the ending designation command (S1694: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1695. If the command in the reception buffer is not the ending designation command (S1694: No), the current command analysis processing ends.

  In step S1695, the sub CPU 120a performs a special game end effect control process, and proceeds to step S1696. In the special game end effect control process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the ending designation command in the reception buffer, determines an ending effect pattern, and stores information of the determined effect pattern in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specifying command of the determined effect pattern, and sets the effect pattern specifying command in the transmission buffer. The sub CPU 120a clears any flags set during the special game, if any.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the special game end effect control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, according to the command, the special game ending effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting. The program is executed by the device 34.

  In step S1696, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the jackpot that has triggered the execution of the finished special game is a normal hit or a probable hit. If the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game is a normal hit (S1696: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1697. When the jackpot that has triggered the execution of the special game is the probability change jackpot (S1696: No), the process proceeds to step S1698.

  In step S1697, the sub CPU 120a performs a special training mode start control process. In the special training mode start control process, the sub CPU 120a sets an effect pattern designation command for the special training mode in the transmission buffer. The details of the special training mode start control processing will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the special training mode start control processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the special training mode effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device according to the command. 34.

  In step S1698, the sub CPU 120a performs a live mode start control process. In the live mode start control process, the sub CPU 120a sets a live mode effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer. The details of the live mode start control processing will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the live mode start control processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the live mode effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device according to the command. 34.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing details of the prefetch effect effect selection process (step S1622 in FIG. 90). In FIG. 95, the sub CPU 120a sets a hold corresponding to the storage unit in the effect information storage area in which the start winning designation command is stored in the start winning designation command storage process as a look-ahead determination target hold, and the fluctuation of the look-ahead determination target hold evolves. It is determined whether or not the variation has an effect (S1622-1). If the change has the development effect (S1622-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-2. If it is not a change having an advanced effect (S1622-1: No), the current look-ahead effect effect selection process ends.

  In step S1622-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a change having an advanced effect in the hold whose change order is earlier than the hold of the prefetch determination target. When there is no change having the development effect (S1622-2: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-3. If there is a change having an advanced effect (S1622-2: Yes), the current look-ahead effect effect selection process ends.

  In step S1622-3, the sub CPU 120a performs a prefetch effect effect execution determination process. In the prefetch effect effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 2 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the look-ahead effect effect execution determination table of the sub-ROM 120b, and prefetches based on a combination of a pre-judgment result (big hit or losing) indicated by the start winning prize designation command of the pre-fetch determination target hold and the random number value 2 for effect. It is determined whether or not execution of an effect effect is required.

  FIG. 96 (a) is a diagram showing a look-ahead effect effect execution determination table. In the look-ahead effect effect execution determination table, the combination of the effect random number 2 and the data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is different from the one referred to when the pre-judgment result is a big hit. Are stored separately for those to be referred to. Specifically, for the jackpot, 60 (0 to 59) effect random number values 2 are associated with data indicating that a prefetch effect effect is to be executed, and 40 (60 to 99) effect random numbers are used. The random number value 2 is associated with data indicating that the prefetch effect effect is not executed. As for the loss, 40 (0 to 39) effect random number values 2 are associated with data indicating that a prefetch effect effect is to be performed, and 60 (40 to 99) effect random number values 2 are prefetched. It is associated with data indicating that an effect effect is not executed.

  In step S1622-4, the sub CPU 120a checks whether the determination result of the prefetch effect effect execution determination process is “execute” or “do not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1622-4: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-5. When the determination result is “do not execute” (S1622-4: No), the current look-ahead effect effect selection process ends.

  In step S1622-5, the sub CPU 120a performs a prefetch effect final stage determination process. In the prefetch effect final stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 3 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the final stage effect display mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and, based on a combination of the preliminary determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the start winning prize designation command of the prefetch determination target hold and the random number for effect 3, The display mode of the hold display image 37 at the final stage in the prefetch effect effect is determined.

  FIG. 96 (b) is a diagram showing a final-stage effect display mode determination table. In the final stage effect display mode determination table, a set of the effect random number 3 and data indicating the final stage effect (“blue”, “green”, and “red”) is referred to when the pre-judgment result is a big hit. It is stored separately for those who do and those that are referenced when they lose. Specifically, for the jackpot, ten (0 to 9) effect random number values 3 are associated with data indicating “blue effect”, and 30 (10 to 39) effect random number values 3 Is associated with data indicating “green effect”, and 60 (40 to 99) effect random number values 3 are associated with data indicating “red effect”. As for the loss, 60 (0 to 59) effect random number values 3 are associated with data indicating “blue effect”, and 30 (60 to 89) effect random number values 3 are “green effect”. , And ten (90 to 99) effect random number values 3 are associated with the data indicating “red effect”.

  In step S1622-6, the sub CPU 120a performs a prefetch effect effect scenario determination process. In the prefetch effect effect scenario determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 4 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table in the sub-ROM 120b, and determines the pre-judgment result (big hit or losing) indicated by the start winning prize designation command of the pre-fetch judgment target hold, the final stage effect, the number of hold, and the random number for effect Based on the combination of the four, a prefetch effect effect scenario is determined.

  There are two types of look-ahead effect presentation scenario determination tables, one to refer to when the pre-judgment result is a big hit, and one to refer to when a loss occurs. FIG. 97 is a diagram illustrating a look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table referred to when the result of the preliminary determination is a jackpot. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table to be referred to when the pre-judgment result is a loss.

  In the look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table, a set of the effect random number value 4 and the look-ahead effect effect scenario data is stored for each combination corresponding to the combination of the effect in the final stage of the look-ahead effect effect and the number of reservations. In the jackpot hit look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table (FIG. 97) and the loss look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table (FIG. 98), the random number value 4 for the effect to the effect scenarios ER39 and ER49 of the look-ahead effect effect called “fall” is called. The assignment is different.

  More specifically, in this table, the option corresponding to the combination of blue and one hold number includes a prefetch effect effect scenario EB11. The look-ahead effect effect scenario EB11 is a scenario in which a blue effect appears in the final fluctuation. The prefetch effect effect scenario EB11 is associated with 100 (0 to 99) effect random number values 4. The options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of holdings of two include look-ahead effect rendering scenarios EB21 and EB22. The look-ahead effect presentation scenarios EB21 and EB22 are scenarios in which the blue effect appears at different times. 70 (0 to 69) effect random numbers 4 for effect are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenario EB21, and 30 (70 to 99) effect random numbers 4 for effect are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenario EB22. .

  The options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of reservations of three include a prefetch effect effect scenario EB31, EB32, and EB33. The prefetch effect effect scenarios EB31, EB32, and EB33 are scenarios in which the blue effect appears at different times. 20 to 50 effect random number values 4 are respectively associated with the prefetch effect effect scenarios EB31, EB32, and EB33. The options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of reservations of four include a look-ahead effect effect scenario EB41, EB42, EB43, and EB44. The prefetch effect effect scenarios EB41, EB42, EB43, and EB44 are scenarios in which the time at which the blue effect appears differs. 10 to 40 effect random number values 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenarios EB41, EB42, EB43, and EB44, respectively.

  The option corresponding to the combination of green and one hold number includes a prefetch effect effect scenario EG11. The look-ahead effect effect scenario EG11 is a scenario in which a green effect appears in the final fluctuation. One hundred (0-99) effect random number values 4 are associated with the look-ahead effect effect scenario EG11. The options corresponding to the combination of green and the number of hold 2 include the look-ahead effect effect scenarios EG21 and EG22. The look-ahead effect rendering scenarios EG21 and EG22 are scenarios in which the time at which the green effect appears and the presence or absence of the blue effect before reaching the green effect are different. 70 (0-69) effect random number 4 for effect are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenario EG21, and 30 (70-99) effect random number 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenario EG22. .

  Options corresponding to the combination of green and the number of reservations of three include prefetch effect effect scenarios EG31 to EG38. The look-ahead effect rendering scenarios EG31 to EG38 are scenarios in which the time when the green effect appears and the presence / absence of the blue effect before reaching the green effect are different. Five to twenty effect random number values 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenarios EG31 to EG38, respectively. The options corresponding to the combination of green and the number of reservations of four include prefetch effect effect scenarios EG41 to EG48. The prefetch effect effect scenarios EG41 to EG48 are scenarios in which the time when the green effect appears and the presence / absence of the blue effect before reaching the green effect are different. Five to twenty effect random number values 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenarios EG41 to EG48, respectively.

  An option corresponding to a combination of red and one hold number includes a look-ahead effect effect scenario ER11. The prefetch effect effect scenario ER11 is a scenario in which a red effect appears in the final fluctuation. 100 (0 to 99) effect random number values 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenario ER11. Options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of holdings of two include a prefetch effect effect scenario ER21, ER22, ER23, and ER24. The look-ahead effect presentation scenarios ER21, ER22, ER23, and ER24 are scenarios in which the time at which the red effect appears and the presence or absence of the blue and green effects before reaching the red effect are different. 10 to 40 effect random numbers 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenarios ER21, ER22, ER23, and ER24, respectively.

  The options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of reservations of three include prefetch effect effect scenarios ER31 to ER39. The pre-read effect effect scenarios ER31 to ER39 are scenarios in which the time when the red effect appears and the presence / absence of the blue effect and the green effect before reaching the red effect are different. Here, the look-ahead effect rendering scenarios ER31 to ER38 are “start-up” scenarios in which an effect of a more reliable color appears in a later variation than in the previous variation, such as blue → green → red. On the other hand, the look-ahead effect rendering scenario ER39 is a “falling-down” scenario in which an effect of a color having a lower degree of reliability, such as green → red → green, in the later variation than in the preceding variation appears. In the jackpot table (FIG. 97), 5 to 20 effect random numbers 4 are associated with the look-ahead effect effect scenarios ER31 to ER38, and 1 (99) effect randomness is associated with the look-ahead effect effect scenario ER39. Numerical value 4 is associated. On the other hand, in the loss table (FIG. 98), 5 to 20 effect random number values 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenarios ER31 to ER38. In the loss table, no effect random number value 4 is associated with the look-ahead effect effect scenario ER39.

  The options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of reservations of four include prefetch effect effect scenarios ER41 to ER49. The look-ahead effect rendering scenarios ER41 to ER49 are scenarios in which the time when the red effect appears and the presence / absence of the blue effect and the green effect before reaching the red effect are different. Among the prefetch effect effect scenarios ER41 to ER49, the prefetch effect effect scenarios ER41 to ER48 are “rise” scenarios, and the prefetch effect effect scenario ER49 is a “fall” scenario. In the jackpot table (FIG. 97), 5 to 20 random number values 4 for effect are associated with the look-ahead effect effect scenarios ER41 to ER48, and one (99) effect randomness 4 is associated with the look-ahead effect effect scenario ER49. Numerical value 4 is associated. On the other hand, in the loss table (FIG. 98), five to twenty effect random number values 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenarios ER41 to ER48. In the loss table, no effect random number value 4 is associated with the prefetch effect effect scenario ER49.

  In this way, in the gaming machine 1, for the combination of red and the number of reservations of three and the combination of red and the number of reservations of four, the "falling down" look-ahead effect production scenarios ER39 and ER49 can be selected only from the jackpot table. Has become. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1, the look-ahead effect effect of “falling down” is a final change jackpot confirmation effect (an effect of notifying that the final change becomes a jackpot before the symbol of the final change is stopped).

  In step S1622-7 in FIG. 95, the sub CPU 120a stores the scenario data of the look-ahead effect effect scenario determined in the look-ahead effect effect scenario determination process in the storage unit in the effect information storage area.

  Here, in the pre-reading effect effect selection process, when there is an advanced effect in the pre-read determination target hold and there is no advanced effect in the previous change in the change order (S1622-1: Yes → S1622-2: No), the pre-read is performed. An effect effect execution determination process is performed. According to such a processing flow, when performing the look-ahead effect effect, the effect control board 120 executes the development effect as the effect of displaying the change of the final change of the look-ahead effect effect, and the final change of the look-ahead effect effect. It is restricted that the development effect is executed as the effect during the variable display before the change display.

  FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing details of the effect symbol determination process (step S1631 in FIG. 90). In FIG. 99, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the change stops at the symbol with a big hit (S1631-1). When the fluctuation stops at the symbol with the big hit (S1631-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1631-2. When the fluctuation does not stop at the symbol of the big hit (S1631-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1631-3.

  In step S1631-2, the sub CPU 120a selects the symbol combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z from those corresponding to the type of the winning jackpot, and in the selected symbol combination. Four stop symbol numbers of a left symbol 36L, a middle symbol 36C, a right symbol 36R, and a fourth symbol 36Z are determined.

  In step S1631-3, the sub CPU 120a selects a symbol combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z from those corresponding to the loss, and selects the left symbol 36L in the selected symbol combination. The four stop symbol numbers of the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are determined.

  In step S1631-4, the sub CPU 120a stores the determined four stopped symbol numbers in the effect symbol storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

  In step S1631-5, the sub CPU 120a generates a stop symbol designation command for notifying the determined four stop symbol numbers, and sets the generated stop symbol designation command in the transmission buffer.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing details of the SP-specific announcement effect selection process (step S1648 in FIG. 90). In FIG. 100, the sub CPU 120a performs an SP-specific announcement effect execution determination process (S1648-1). In the SP specific announcement effect execution determination processing, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 5 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the SP specific announcement effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines whether or not to execute the SP specific announcement effect based on the jackpot lottery result and the effect random number value 5.

  FIG. 101 (a) is a diagram showing an SP-specific announcement effect execution determination table. In the SP specific announcement effect execution determination table, a set of data indicating the effect random number 5 and the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is referred to when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. The jackpot lottery results are stored separately for those to be referred to when the player loses. Specifically, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, five (0 to 4) effect random numbers 5 indicate that the SP specific announcement effect is to be executed, and 95 (5 to 99) effect random numbers are used. The random number value 5 is associated with data indicating that the SP specific announcement effect is not executed. If the jackpot lottery result is lost, 100 (0 to 99) effect random numbers 5 are associated with data indicating that the SP specific announcement effect is not executed.

  In step S1648-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the SP-specific announcement effect execution determination process is “execute” or “do not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1648-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1648-3. When the determination result is “do not execute” (S1648-2: No), the current SP specific announcement effect selection process ends.

  In step S1648-3, the sub CPU 120a performs the SP-specific announcement effect execution timing determination process, and then proceeds to step S1648-4. In the SP-specific announcement effect execution timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 6 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the SP specific announcement effect execution timing determination table in the sub ROM 120b and determines the effect pattern of the SP specific announcement effect based on the random number value 6 for effect.

  FIG. 101 (b) is a diagram showing an SP specific notice effect effect execution timing determination table. The SP-specific announcement effect execution timing determination table stores a set of the effect random number 6 and the SP-specific announcement effect timing data.

  Specifically, the options in this table include SP specific announcement effect timing data SPY11 and SPY12. The SP specific notice effect timing data SPY11 is for executing the SP specific notice effect immediately after the start of the change. The SP specific notice effect timing data SPY12 is for executing the SP specific notice effect during the normal change of the change.

  In this table, three (0 to 2) effect random number values 6 are associated with the SP specific announcement effect timing data SPY11. 97 (3 to 99) effect random number values 6 are associated with the SP specific notice effect timing data SPY12.

  In step S1648-4, sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specifying command for instructing execution of the SP specific notice effect at the timing determined in the SP specific notice effect execution timing determination process, and transmits the generated effect pattern designation command to the transmission buffer. Set to.

  Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1648-4, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 execute the SP-specific announcement effect specified by the command (immediately after the start of the change or during normal change). , The SP specific notice effect is executed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device.

  Here, the SP specific notice effect selection process is not executed when the SP reach effect is not executed in the fluctuation (Step S1647: No in FIG. 91). Further, in the table (FIG. 101A) referred to in the SP specific announcement effect execution determination process (S1648-1 in FIG. 100) in the SP specific announcement effect selection process, the SP specific announcement in a case where the jackpot lottery result is a big hit. The selectivity of the data indicating that the effect is to be executed is 5%, and the selectivity of the data indicating that the SP specific announcement effect is to be executed when the jackpot lottery result is a loss is 0%. With such a processing flow and the configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 performs the SP specific announcement effect when the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect is performed after the loss-reach effect during the special symbol change display. When the jackpot notification effect is executed through the execution of the SP reach effect after the losing reach effect, the execution of the SP specific notice effect is enabled.

  FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing details of the SPSP specific notice effect selection process (step S1650 in FIG. 91). In FIG. 102, the sub CPU 120a performs a SPSP specific notice effect production execution determination process (S1650-1). In the SPSP specific announcement effect execution determination processing, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 7 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the SPSP specific announcement effect execution determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and determines whether or not to execute the SPSP specific announcement effect based on the jackpot lottery result and the effect random number value 7.

  FIG. 103 (a) is a diagram showing an SPSP-specific announcement effect execution determination table. In the SPSP specific announcement effect execution determination table, a set of data indicating the effect random number 7 and the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is referred to when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. The jackpot lottery results are stored separately for those to be referred to when the player loses. Specifically, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, five (0 to 4) production random numbers 7 indicate that the SPSP specific notice effect is to be executed, and 95 (5 to 99) production random numbers The random number 7 is associated with data indicating that the SPSP specific announcement effect is not executed. When the jackpot lottery result is lost, 100 (0 to 99) effect random numbers 7 are associated with data indicating that the SPSP specific announcement effect is not executed.

  In step S1650-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the SPSP specific notice effect production execution determination process is “execute” or “do not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1650-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1650-3. If the determination result is “do not execute” (S1650-2: No), the current SPSP-specific announcement effect selection process ends.

  In step S1650-3, sub CPU 120a performs the SPSP specific notice effect execution timing determination process, and then proceeds to step S1650-4. In the SPSP-specific announcement effect execution timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 8 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the SPSP specific announcement effect execution timing determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and determines the effect pattern of the SPSP specific announcement effect based on the random number value 8 for effect.

  FIG. 103 (b) is a diagram showing a SPSP specific notice effect execution timing determination table. The SPSP specific notice effect execution timing determination table stores a set of the effect random number 8 and the effect pattern of the SPSP specific notice effect.

  Specifically, the options in this table include SP specific announcement effect timing data SPY21, SPY22, and SPY23. The SP specific notice effect timing data SPY21 is for executing the SP specific notice effect immediately after the start of the change. The SP specific notice effect timing data SPY22 executes the SPSP specific notice effect during the normal fluctuation of the fluctuation. The SP specific notice effect timing data SPY23 is for executing the SPSP specific notice effect during the SP reach effect of the fluctuation.

  In this table, three (0 to 2) effect random number values 8 are associated with the SPSP specific announcement effect timing data SPY22. 97 (3 to 99) effect random number values 8 are associated with the SPSP specific notice effect timing data SPY23. The SPSP-specific announcement effect timing data SPY21 has no effect random number value 8 associated with it.

  In step S1650-4, sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specifying command for instructing execution of the SPSP specific notice effect at the timing determined in the SPSP specific notice effect execution timing determination process, and transmits the generated effect pattern designation command to the transmission buffer. Set to.

  Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1650-4, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 execute the SPSP specific notice effect specified by the command (immediately after the start of the fluctuation, during normal fluctuation, or , SP reach effect), the SPSP specific notice effect is executed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device.

  Here, the SPSP specific notice effect selection process is not executed when the SPSP reach effect is not executed in the fluctuation (Step S1649: No in FIG. 91). Also, in the table (FIG. 103 (a)) referred to in the SPSP-specific announcement effect execution determination process (S1650-1 in FIG. 102) in the SPSP-specific announcement effect selection process, the SPSP-specific announcement when the jackpot lottery result is a big hit The selectivity of the data indicating that the effect is to be executed is 5%, and the selectivity of the data indicating that the SPSP specific announcement effect is to be executed when the jackpot lottery result is a loss is 0%. With such a processing flow and the configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 performs the SPSP specific announcement effect when the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed after the loss-reach effect during the special symbol change display. When the jackpot notification effect is executed through the execution of the SPSP reach effect after the losing reach effect, the execution of the SPSP specific notice effect is enabled.

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart illustrating details of the dialogue operation effect operation result determination process (step S1652 in FIG. 91). In FIG. 104, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue speaker determination process (S1652-1). In the dialogue speaker determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 9 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the dialogue speaker determination table in the sub ROM 120b and determines a character to be a dialogue speaker based on the random number value 9 for effect.

  FIG. 105 (a) is a diagram showing a dialogue speaker determination table. A set of a production random number 9 and characters A, B, C, and D is stored in the dialogue speaker determination table. Specifically, each of the characters A, B, C, and D is associated with 25 effect random number values 9.

  In step S1652-2, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue determination process. In the line determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 10 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the line determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines the line based on the jackpot lottery result and the random number value 10 for effect.

  FIG. 105 (b) is a diagram illustrating a dialogue determination table. In the dialogue determination table, each set of the production random number value 10 and the dialogue is stored separately for those to be referred to when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot and those to be referred to when the jackpot lottery result is lost. .

  Specifically, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, 50 (0-49) staging random numbers 10 for "hot fever" and 50 (50-99) for "chance" Are associated with each other. No random number value 10 for effect is associated with "...". In the case where the jackpot lottery result is lost, 34 (0-33) effect random number values 10 for "hot fever" and 33 (34-66) effect random number values for "chance" 10 are associated with 33 (67 to 99) effect random number values 10 for "...", respectively.

  In step S1652-3, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specifying command of an operation result corresponding to a combination of the character determined in the line utterer determining process and the line determined in the line determining process, and generates the generated effect pattern specifying command. Set in the transmission buffer.

  Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1652-3, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 wait for the operation button 36 to be operated in the dialog operation effect, and immediately after the operation of the effect button 36. Then, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34 execute the effect of the operation result specified by the command.

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the details of the dialogue operation specific notice effect selection process (step S1655 in FIG. 91). In FIG. 106, the sub CPU 120a performs a speech operation specific notice effect execution determination process (S1655-1). In the serif operation specific announcement effect execution determination processing, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 11 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the speech operation specific announcement effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines whether or not to execute the speech operation specific announcement effect based on the execution timing of the speech operation effect and the effect random number 11 within the fluctuation. judge. Here, as described above, some of the symbol variation effect patterns in the variation effect pattern determination table are those that execute the serif operation effect immediately after the symbol variation starts (the symbol variation effect patterns 111, 112, 121, 122, 011 and 012) and those that execute a line operation effect after the reach is established (symbol variation effect patterns 114 and 123). If the symbol variation effect patterns 111, 112, 121, 122, 011, 012, etc. are determined in the variation effect pattern determination process (step S1646 in FIG. 91), the execution timing of the line operation effect is immediately after the start of the variation, and When the variable effect patterns 114 and 123 are determined, the execution timing of the line operation effect is after the reach is established.

  FIG. 107 (a) is a diagram showing a dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table. In the dialogue operation specific announcement effect execution determination table, a set of a random number 11 for effect and data indicating necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is stored when the execution timing of the dialogue operation effect is immediately after the start of fluctuation. Those that are referred to at a certain time and those that are referred to when the reach is established are separately stored. Specifically, immediately after the start of the change, 100 (0 to 99) effect random numbers 11 are associated with data indicating that the dialogue operation specific notice effect is not executed. No effect random number value 11 is associated with the data indicating that the line operation specific notice effect is to be executed. After the reach is established, the data indicating that 30 (0 to 29) effect random number values 11 execute the speech operation specific notice effect, and the 70 (30 to 99) effect random number values 11 are used for the speech operation. It is associated with data indicating that the specific notice effect is not executed.

  In step S1655-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the result of the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1655-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1655-3. When the determination result is “do not execute” (S1655-2: No), the current dialogue operation specific notice effect selection process ends.

  In step S1655-3, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue operation specific announcement effect execution timing determination process, and then proceeds to step S1655-4. In the dialogue operation specific announcement effect execution timing determination processing, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 12 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and the dialogue determined in the dialogue determination process (S1652-2 in FIG. 104) in the dialogue operation effect operation result determination process, and the production disturbance. Based on the numerical value 12, the effect pattern of the dialogue operation specific notice effect is determined.

  FIG. 107 (b) is a diagram illustrating a speech operation specific notice effect presentation execution timing determination table. In the dialogue operation specific announcement effect execution timing determination table, the combination of the effect random number 12 and the dialogue operation specific advancement effect timing data is referred to when the dialogue is "...", and when it is "Chance" , And those that are referred to in the case of "It's feverish".

  More specifically, the options in this table include dialogue operation specific notice effect timing data SRY11, SRY12, and SRY13. The line operation specific notice effect timing data SRY11 is for executing a line operation specific notice effect immediately after the start of the change. The line operation specific notice effect timing data SRY12 is for executing a line operation specific notice effect during the normal change of the change. The line operation specific notice effect timing data SRY13 is for executing a line operation specific notice effect after the reach of the fluctuation is established. Regarding "It's fiery heat," 40 (0-39) effect random number values 12 in the dialogue operation specific announcement effect timing data SRY12 and 60 (40-99) in the lineage operation specific announcement effect timing data SRY13. The effect random number values 12 are associated with each other. No effect random number value 12 is associated with the line operation specific notice effect timing data SRY11. As for "chance," 50 (0-49) random number values for production are provided in the dialogue operation specific announcement production timing data SRY12, and 50 (50-99) are provided in the dialogue operation specific announcement production timing data SRY13. Are associated with each other. No effect random number value 12 is associated with the line operation specific notice effect timing data SRY11. As for “...”, 90 (0 to 89) effect random number values 12 are included in the dialogue operation specific announcement effect timing data SRY12, and 10 (90 to 99) effect are included in the dialogue operation specific announcement effect timing data SRY13. The use random numbers 12 are associated with each other. No effect random number value 12 is associated with the line operation specific notice effect timing data SRY11.

  In step S1655-4, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designating command for instructing the execution of the dialogue operation specific notice effect at the timing determined in the dialogue operation specific notice effect execution timing determination process, and transmits the generated effect pattern designation command. Set in the transmission buffer.

  When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1655-4, at the timing specified by the command, the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, The effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c and the effect lighting device 34 are executed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 16, the dialogue operation effect includes an operation promoting effect (an effect in which an image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image indicating the operation acceptance valid period, and an image of “press!”) Appear. And an operation result effect (a character A, B, C, or D appears and a word is displayed in a speech balloon). In the table (FIG. 107 (a)) referred to in the specific announcement effect execution determination process (S1655-1) in the dialogue operation specific announcement effect selection process, the execution timing of the dialogue operation effect is immediately after the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The selection rate of the data indicating that the dialogue specific announcement effect is to be executed in the case is 0%, and the data indicating that the dialogue specific announcement effect is executed when the execution timing of the dialogue operation effect is after the reach is established. Is 30%. In the table (FIG. 107 (b)) referred to in the dialogue operation specific notice effect execution timing determination processing (S1655-3), when the dialogue as the operation result is "..." and "chance is good" , And the selection rate of the data in which the execution timing of the specific announcement operation for the dialogue operation in the case of “the heat is hot” is immediately after the start of the fluctuation, is 0%. With such a processing flow and the configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 restricts the execution of the speech operation specific notice effect immediately after the start of the change display of the special symbol. Immediately after the start of the special symbol change display, the effect control board 120 can execute only the operation promotion effect that does not accompany the special operation notice announcement effect, and at the timing except immediately after the start of the special symbol change display, the line operation identification is performed. It is possible to execute both an operation promoting effect with a notice effect and an operation promoting effect without a dialogue specific notice effect.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing details of the shortened fluctuation announcement effect selection process (step S1666 in FIG. 92). In FIG. 108, the sub CPU 120a performs a shortened fluctuation announcement effect execution determination process (S1666-1). In the shortened fluctuation announcement effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 13 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the shortened variation announcement effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b and determines whether or not the execution of the shortened variation announcement effect is required based on the random number value 13 for effect.

  FIG. 109 (a) is a diagram showing a shortened fluctuation announcement effect execution determination table. The shortened fluctuation announcement effect execution determination table stores an effect random number 13 and a set of data indicating necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”). Specifically, data indicating that 30 (0-29) effect random number values 13 execute the shortened fluctuation notice effect, and 70 (30-99) effect random number values 13 indicate the shortened change notice effect. Are not associated with the data, respectively.

  In step S1666-2, the sub CPU 120a checks whether the determination result of the shortened fluctuation announcement effect execution determination process is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1666-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1666-3. When the result of the determination is "do not execute" (S1666-2: No), the current reduced fluctuation announcement effect selection process ends.

  In step S1666-3, the sub CPU 120a performs a shortened fluctuation announcement effect execution timing determination process, and then proceeds to step S1666-4. In the shortened fluctuation announcement effect execution timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 14 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the reduced variation announcement effect execution timing determination table in the sub ROM 120b and determines an effect pattern of the shortened variation announcement effect based on the effect random number 14.

  FIG. 109 (b) is a diagram showing a shortened fluctuation announcement effect execution timing determination table. A set of the effect random number 14 and the shortened fluctuation announcement effect timing data is stored in the shortened fluctuation announcement effect execution timing determination table.

  More specifically, the options in this table include shortened fluctuation announcement effect timing data TSY11, TSY12, and TSY13. The shortened fluctuation announcement effect timing data TSY11 is for executing a shortened fluctuation announcement effect immediately after the start of the fluctuation. The shortened fluctuation announcement effect timing data TSY12 is for executing the shortened fluctuation announcement effect during the fluctuation of the fluctuation (slower than immediately after the start of the fluctuation and earlier than immediately before the stop of the fluctuation). The shortened fluctuation announcement effect timing data TSY13 is for executing a shortened fluctuation announcement effect immediately before stopping the fluctuation of the fluctuation. Ninety (0-89) effect random number values 14 for the abbreviated fluctuation announcement effect timing data TSY12, and ten (90-99) effect random number values 14 for the abbreviated fluctuation announcement effect timing data TSY13, respectively. It is attached. None of the effect random number values 14 are associated with the shortened fluctuation announcement effect timing data TSY11.

  In step S1666-4, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specifying command for instructing the execution of the shortened fluctuation announcement effect at the timing determined in the shortened fluctuation announcement effect execution timing determination process, and transmits the generated effect pattern specification command to the transmission buffer. Set to.

  When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1666-4, at the timing designated by the command, the shortened fluctuation notice effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect. Drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c and effect lighting device 34.

  Here, in the table (FIG. 109B) referred to in the shortened fluctuation announcement effect execution timing determination process (S1666-3) in the shortened fluctuation announcement effect selection process, the execution timing of the shortened fluctuation announcement effect is set immediately after the start of the fluctuation. The data selectivity is 0%. With such a processing flow and the configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 restricts the execution of the shortened change announcement effect immediately after the start of the change display of the special symbol. The effect control board 120 restricts the execution of the shortened fluctuation announcement effect immediately after the start of the special symbol fluctuation display, and executes the shortened fluctuation announcement effect at a timing except immediately after the start of the special symbol fluctuation display.

  FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing details of the loss notice effect selection process (step S1667 in FIG. 92). In FIG. 110, the sub CPU 120a performs a loss notice effect execution determination process (S1667-1). In the loss notice effect execution determination processing, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 15 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the loss notification effect execution determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and determines whether or not the execution of the loss notification effect is necessary based on the random number value 15 for effect.

  FIG. 111 (a) is a diagram illustrating a loss notice effect presentation execution determination table. In the outlier notice effect execution determination table, a set of the effect random number 15 and the data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is different from the one referred to when the jackpot lottery result is a big hit. Are stored separately for those that are referred to at the time of. Specifically, for the jackpot, 100 (0 to 99) effect random numbers 15 are associated with data indicating that no announcement notice effect is to be executed. There is no effect random number value 15 associated with the data indicating that the outlier announcement effect is to be executed. As for the loss, the data indicating that 30 (0 to 29) random number values for effect 15 are to perform a loss notice effect, and the 70 random number values for effect 15 (30 to 99) are not to perform a loss notice effect. Is associated with the data indicating the fact.

  In step S1667-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the result of the loss notice effect production execution determination process is “execute” or “do not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1667-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1667-3. If the result of the determination is “do not execute” (S1667-2: No), the present loss notice effect selection process ends.

  In step S1667-3, the sub CPU 120a performs a loss notice effect execution timing determination process, and then proceeds to step S1667-4. In the loss notice effect execution timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 16 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the table for determining the advance notice effect execution timing of the sub ROM 120b, and determines the effect pattern of the advance notice effect based on the presence or absence of the reach in the variation and the effect random number 16.

  FIG. 111 (b) is a diagram illustrating a loss notice effect presentation execution timing determination table. In the outlier notice effect execution timing determination table, a set of the effect random number value 16 and the outlier notice effect timing data is referred to when the variation does not reach reach (either normal variation or shortened variation). The change is stored separately for reference when the reach is established.

  More specifically, the options in this table include missed announcement effect timing data HZY11, HZY12, HZY13, and HZY14. The miss notice effect timing data HZY11 is for executing a miss notice effect immediately after the start of the change. The miss notice effect timing data HZY12 executes a miss notice effect during the normal change of the change. The loss notice effect timing data HZY13 executes a loss notice effect after the reach of the fluctuation is established. The miss notice effect timing data HZY14 executes a miss notice effect immediately before the stop of the change. Regarding the absence of the reach, 90 (0 to 89) random number 16 for effect are provided in the off notice effect timing data HZY12, and 10 (90 to 99) random number 16 for effect are provided in the off notice effect timing data HZY14. Each is associated. None of the effect random number values 16 are associated with the outlier notice effect timing data HZY11 and HZY13. Regarding the presence of the reach, two (0 to 1) effect random numbers 16 are provided in the off notice effect timing data HZY12, and two (2 to 3) effect random numbers 16 are provided in the off notice effect timing data HZY13. 96 (4 to 99) effect random number values 16 are associated with the loss notice effect timing data HZY14. None of the effect random number values 16 are associated with the loss notice effect timing data HZY11.

  In step S1667-4, sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command for instructing execution of a loss notice effect at the timing determined in the loss notice effect effect execution timing determination process, and sets the generated effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer. I do.

  When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1667-4, at a timing designated by the command, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, The driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c and the lighting device for effect 34 are executed.

  Here, in the table (FIG. 111B) referred to in the loss notice effect execution timing determination processing (S1667-3) in the loss notice effect selection processing, selection of data that sets the execution timing of the loss notice effect to immediately after the start of fluctuation. The rate is 0%. With such a processing flow and the configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 restricts the execution of the advance notice effect immediately after the start of the variable display of the special symbol. The effect control board 120 regulates the execution of the advance notice effect immediately after the start of the special symbol change display, and executes the stop notice effect at a timing except immediately after the start of the special symbol change display.

  FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing details of the mode effect control process (step S1668 in FIG. 92). In FIG. 112, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the special training mode executing flag is set in the special training mode executing flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1668-1). When the special training mode running flag is set (S1668-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1668-2. If the special training mode execution flag is not set (S1668-1: No), the current mode effect control process ends. The special training mode executing flag is a flag indicating that the special training mode is being executed. The special training mode running flag is set in step S1697-2 (FIG. 126) in the special training mode start control processing (S1697 in FIG. 93) after the special game when the winning is made in the normal winning.

  In step S1668-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the special training mode remaining number counter of the sub RAM 120c is 0. When the special training mode remaining number counter is not 0 (S1668-2: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1668-3. When the special training mode remaining number counter is 0 (S1668-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1668-4. When the special training mode remaining number counter is won in the normal case, 100 is set in step S1697-3 (FIG. 126) in the special training mode start control process (S1697 in FIG. 93) after the special game.

  In step S1668-3, the sub CPU 120a updates the special training mode remaining number counter by -1. After that, the current mode effect control process ends.

  In step S1668-4, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command for the special training mode end effect, and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer. In the next step S1668-5, the sub CPU 120a clears the special training mode executing flag in the special training mode executing flag storage area. After that, the current mode effect control process ends.

  When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1668-4, the special training mode end effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c and the effect lighting device 34.

  FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing details of the stage change determination process (step S1623 in FIG. 90). In FIG. 113, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the current game mode is the normal mode (S1623-1). If the gaming state information in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 120c is that of the non-time saving gaming state and the low-probability gaming state, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the current game mode is the normal mode (S1623-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1632-2. When the current game mode is either the special training mode or the live mode (S1623-1: No), the current stage change determination process ends.

  In step S1623-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the start winning designation command stored in the effect information storage area in the start winning designation command storage processing is the loss winning information. When the start winning designation command is for the loss winning information (S1623-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1623-3. When the start winning designation command is that of the jackpot winning information (S1623-2: No), the current stage change determination process ends.

  In step S1623-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stage change notice standby flag is set in the stage change notice standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. When the stage change notice waiting flag is not set (S1623-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1623-4. If the stage change notice waiting flag is set (S1623-3: Yes), the current stage change determination process ends. The stage change notice waiting flag is a flag indicating that the stage change notice effect is waiting to be executed.

  In step S1623-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not all items in the hold are lost. If all of the start winning designation commands in the storage section of the effect information storage area are for the loss winning information, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If the winning prize information is included in the start prize designation command in the storage section of the effect information storage area, the determination result in this step is “No”. When all of the items in the hold are lost (S1623-4: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1623-5. When there is a jackpot in the suspension (S1623-4: No), the sub CPU 120a ends the current stage change determination process.

  In step S1623-5, the sub CPU 120a performs a stage change execution determination process. In the stage change execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 17 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the stage change execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines whether or not the stage change needs to be executed based on the number of changes from the previous stage change and the effect random number 17.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a stage change execution determination table. In the stage change execution determination table, a set of the effect random number 17 and the data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is stored in a table in which the number of changes from the previous stage change is 0 to 9 times. When the number of changes from the previous stage change is 10 to 19 times, it is referred to when the number of changes from the previous stage change is 20 or more. It is remembered. In this table, as the number of changes from the previous stage change is larger, data indicating that the stage change is to be performed is more easily selected. Specifically, for 0 to 9 times, 20 (0 to 19) effect random numbers 17 are associated with data indicating that a stage change is performed, and 80 (20 to 99) The effect random number value is associated with data indicating that no stage change is performed. For 10 to 19 times, 50 (0 to 49) effect random numbers 17 are associated with data indicating that a stage change is to be performed, and 50 (50 to 99) effect random numbers 17 Is associated with data indicating that a stage change is not to be performed. For 20 or more times, 80 (0 to 79) effect random numbers 17 are associated with data indicating that a stage change is to be performed, and 20 (80 to 99) effect random numbers 17 are It is associated with data indicating that a stage change is not executed.

  In step S1623-6, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the stage change effect execution determination process is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1623-6: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1623-7. If the determination result is “do not execute” (S1623-6: No), the current stage change determination process ends.

  In step S1623-7, the sub CPU 120a sets a stage change standby flag in the stage change standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1623-8.

  In step S1623-8, the sub CPU 120a performs a new stage determination process. In the new stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 18 updated in step S1100. In the new stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the new stage determination table in the sub ROM 120b and determines a new stage based on the effect random number 18.

  FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a new stage determination table. In the new stage determination table, each set of the effect random number 18 and the stage data indicating the new stage after the change in the stage change is stored for each one corresponding to the current stay stage.

  Specifically, when the current stage is the marine stage, the options are the savannah stage and the cosmo stage. When the current stage is the savannah stage, the options are the marine stage and the cosmo stage. If the is a cosmo stage, the options are a marine stage and a savannah stage. Each of the options is associated with fifty effect random number values 18.

  In step S1623-9, the sub CPU 120a performs a stage change timing determination process. The stage change timing determination process is a process of determining which of the fluctuation and the fluctuation in the suspension changes the stage. The sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 19 updated in step S1100. In the stage change timing determination processing, the sub CPU 120a refers to the stage change timing determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines the stage change timing based on the number of pending fluctuations of the first special symbol and the effect random number 19. .

  FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a stage change timing determination table. In the stage change timing determination table, a set of the effect random number value 19 and the stage change timing data is stored for each one corresponding to each of the number of pending fluctuations of the first special symbol.

  The option corresponding to the number of suspensions of 0 is stage change timing data STC10. The stage change timing data STC10 indicates that a stage change is to be performed at the change. The stage change timing data STC10 is associated with 100 (0 to 99) effect random numbers 19.

  Options corresponding to one pending number include stage change timing data STC10 and STC11. The stage change timing data STC11 indicates that the stage change is performed after the fluctuations have progressed to the first suspension change at the time of executing the stage change timing determination processing (start winning prize). The stage change timing data STC10 is associated with fifty (0-49) effect random numbers 19, and the stage change timing data STC11 is associated with fifty (50-99) effect random numbers 19. ing.

  Options corresponding to the number of suspensions of two include stage change timing data STC10, STC11, and STC12. The stage change timing data STC12 indicates that the stage change is performed after the variable consumption has progressed to the change of the second hold at the time of execution of the stage change timing determination process (start winning prize). The stage change timing data STC10 includes thirty-four (0 to 33) effect random numbers 19, and the stage change timing data STC11 includes thirty-four (34 to 66) effect random numbers 19, and tage change timing data. 33 (67 to 99) effect random number values 19 are associated with the STC 12, respectively.

  Options corresponding to the number of suspensions of three include stage change timing data STC10, STC11, STC12, and STC13. The stage change timing data STC13 indicates that the stage change is performed after the order of digestion progresses until the change of the third suspension at the time of execution of the stage change timing determination processing (at the time of start winning). The stage change timing data STC10 includes 25 (0 to 24) effect random numbers 19, and the stage change timing data STC11 includes 25 (25 to 49) effect random numbers 19, tage change timing data. The STC 12 is associated with 25 (50 to 74) effect random numbers 19, and the stage change timing data STC 13 is associated with 25 (75 to 99) effect random numbers 19.

  Options corresponding to the number of suspensions of four include stage change timing data STC10, STC11, STC12, STC13, and STC14. The stage change timing data STC14 indicates that the stage change is performed after the fluctuations have progressed to the change of the fourth hold at the time of executing the stage change timing determination process (start winning prize). The stage change timing data STC10 includes 20 (0 to 19) effect random numbers 19, and the stage change timing data STC11 includes 20 (20 to 39) effect random numbers 19, tage change timing data. The STC 12 has 20 (40 to 59) effect random numbers 19, the stage change timing data STC 13 has 20 (60 to 79) effect random numbers 19, and the stage change timing data STC 14 has Twenty (80 to 99) effect random numbers 19 are associated with each other.

  In step S1623-10, the sub CPU 120a generates the stage data of the new stage according to the determination of the new stage determination process and the stage change timing determination process, and stores the stage data in the corresponding storage unit of the effect information storage area. Specifically, the sub CPU 120a stores the 0th storage unit of the effect information storage area when the stage is changed in the change, and the first storage unit in the first effect information storage area when the stage is changed in the first suspension change. When the stage is changed in the second holding change, the second storage unit of the first effect information storage area is changed. When the stage is changed in the third holding change, the third storage unit of the first effect information storage area is changed. When the stage is changed due to the change of the fourth suspension, the fourth storage unit of the first effect information storage area is used as a data storage destination, and the stage data of the new stage is stored in the storage unit of the data storage destination. Here, when the storage destination of the stage data is any of the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the effect information storage area, the stage data stored in the storage unit is subjected to the storage area shift processing (S1641 in FIG. 90). Is shifted to the previous storage unit every time.

  FIGS. 117, 118 and 119 are flowcharts showing details of the stage change announcement effect selection process (step S1625 in FIG. 90). In FIG. 117, in the stage change timing determination process (step S1623-9 in FIG. 113), the sub CPU 120a determines whether to perform the stage change due to the fluctuation or the stage change due to the fluctuation in the suspension. Is confirmed (S1625-1). When the stage is changed due to the change (S1625-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a ends the current stage change announcement effect selection process. When the stage is changed due to the fluctuation within the suspension (S1625-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-2.

  In step S1625-2, the sub CPU 120a performs a stage change announcement effect execution determination process. In the stage change announcement effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 20 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the stage change announcement effect execution determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and determines whether or not to execute the stage change announcement effect based on the random number value 20 for effect.

  FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a stage change announcement effect execution determination table. The stage change announcement effect execution determination table stores a random number value for effect 20 and a data set indicating whether or not to execute (“execute” and “do not execute”). Specifically, 20 (0 to 19) effect random number values 20 are associated with data indicating that a stage change announcement effect is to be executed, and 80 (20 to 99) effect random number values 20 are provided. Is associated with data indicating that the stage change announcement effect is not executed.

  In step S1625-3, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the result of the stage change announcement effect execution determination process is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1625-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1625-4. If the result of the determination is “do not execute” (S1625-3: No), the current stage change announcement effect selection process ends.

  In step S1625-4, the sub CPU 120a sets the stage change notice waiting flag in the stage change notice waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1625-5. The stage change notice waiting flag is a flag indicating that the stage change notice effect is waiting to be executed.

  In step S1625-5, the sub CPU 120a performs a stage change announcement effect execution timing determination process. The stage change announcement effect execution timing determination process is a process of determining at what timing the stage change announcement effect is to be performed. The sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 21 updated in step S1100. In the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination table of the sub ROM 120b and determines in the stage change timing determination process (S1623-9 in FIG. 113) in the stage change determination process. The stage change timing is determined based on the executed stage change execution timing and the effect random number 21.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a stage change announcement effect execution timing determination table. In the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination table, a set of the effect random number 21 and the stage change announcement effect execution timing data is stored for each item corresponding to the stage change execution timing.

  When the execution timing of the stage change is during the first hold variable display, there are stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, and SCY13. The stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY11 indicates that the stage change announcement effect is to be executed immediately after the start of the first hold variation display. The stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY12 indicates that the stage change announcement effect is to be executed immediately before the stop of the first hold variation display. The stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY13 indicates that the stage change announcement effect is to be executed immediately after the stoppage of the first hold variation display. The stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY11 is associated with 100 (0 to 99) effect random numbers 21. The stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY12 and SCY13 have no associated random number value 21 for effect.

  The options when the execution timing of the stage change is in the variable display of the second hold include stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY22, and SCY23. The stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY21 indicates that the stage change announcement effect is to be executed immediately after the start of the second hold variation display. The stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY22 indicates that the stage change announcement effect is to be executed immediately before the stop of the change display of the second hold. The stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY23 indicates that the stage change announcement effect is to be executed immediately after the stoppage of the second hold change display. The stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY12 has thirty-four (0 to 33) effect random numbers 21 in the stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY13, and the thirty-four (34 to 66) effect random numbers 21 in the stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY13. However, the stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY21 is associated with 33 (67-99) effect random numbers 21 for each effect. No stage random number value 21 is associated with the stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY22, and SCY23.

  When the execution timing of the stage change is in the fluctuation display of the third hold, options include stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY22, SCY23, SCY31, SCY32, and SCY33. The stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY31 indicates that the stage change announcement effect is to be executed immediately after the start of the third suspension change display. The stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY32 indicates that the stage change announcement effect is to be executed immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display of the third hold. The stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY33 indicates that the stage change announcement effect is to be executed immediately after the stoppage of the fluctuation display of the third hold. The stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY22 has thirty-four (0-33) effect random numbers 21 in the stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY23, and the thirty-four (34-66) effect random numbers 21 in the stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY23. However, the stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY31 is associated with 33 (67 to 99) effect random numbers 21 for each effect. No stage random number value 21 is associated with the stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY32, and SCY33.

  When the execution timing of the stage change is in the fluctuation display of the fourth hold, the options include stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY22, SCY23, SCY31, SCY32, SCY33, SCY41, SCY42, And SCY43. The stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY41 indicates that the stage change announcement effect is to be executed immediately after the start of the fourth hold variation display. The stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY42 indicates that the stage change announcement effect is to be executed immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display of the fourth hold. The stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY43 indicates that the stage change announcement effect is to be executed immediately after the stoppage of the fourth hold variation display. The stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY32 has thirty-four (0-33) effect random numbers 21, and the stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY33 has thirty-four (34-66) effect random numbers 21. However, the stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY41 is associated with 33 (67 to 99) effect random numbers 21 for each effect. No stage random number 21 is associated with the stage change announcement effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY22, SCY23, SCY31, SCY42, and SCY43.

  Here, in this table, in the case of performing a stage change during the first hold variation display, the selection rate of the notice effect execution timing data SCY11 is set as the stage change notice effect execution timing immediately after the start of the first hold variation display. Is 100%, and the selectivity of the other announcement effect execution timing data SCY12, SCY13 is 0%.

  Also, in the case of performing a stage change during the change display of the second hold, the notice effect execution timing data SCY12, which is the stage change notice effect execution timing immediately before the stop of the change display of the first hold, which is immediately before the digestion order, is performed. Announcement effect execution timing data SCY13 that sets the stage change announcement effect immediately after the stop of the first suspension change display and the announcement effect execution timing that sets the stage change announcement effect immediately after the start of the second change display. The selectivity of the data SCY21 is 33% to 34%, and the selectivity of the other announcement effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY22, and SCY23 is 0%.

  Also, in the case of performing a stage change during the third hold variation display, the announcement effect execution timing data SCY22, which is the stage change announcement effect execution timing immediately before the stop of the second hold variation display preceding the digestion order, is performed. Announcement effect execution timing data SCY23 that sets the stage change announcement effect immediately after the stop of the second suspension change display and the announcement effect execution timing that sets the stage change announcement effect immediately after the start of the third change display. The selectivity of the data SCY31 is 33% to 34%, and the selectivity of the other announcement effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY32, and SCY33 is 0%.

  Also, in the case of performing a stage change during the fourth hold variation display, the announcement effect execution timing data SCY32, which is the stage change announcement effect execution timing immediately before the stop of the third hold variation display preceding the digestion order, is performed. Announcement effect execution timing data SCY33 that sets the stage change announcement effect immediately after the stop of the third suspension change display and the announcement effect execution timing that sets the stage change announcement effect immediately after the start of the fourth change display. The selectivity of the data SCY41 is 33% to 34%, and the selectivity of the other announcement effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY22, SCY23, SCY31, SCY42, and SCY43 is 0%.

  With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 determines the execution of the stage change in the stage change execution determination process (S1623-5 in FIG. 113) in the stage change determination process triggered by the start winning, and follows. When the execution of the stage change announcement effect is determined in the stage change announcement effect execution determination process (S1625-2 in FIG. 117) in the stage change announcement effect selection process, the change display in which the execution of the state change is scheduled is performed. Immediately after the start of the variable display in which the digestion order is previous, the effect indicating that the stage change is changed in the next variable display following the variable display is restricted from being executed as the stage change notice effect. In this case, the effect control board 120 determines whether the stage change is performed immediately before or after the stop display of the variable display in which the digestion order is earlier than the variable display in which the execution of the stage change is scheduled, in the next variable display of the variable display. An effect that suggests a change can be performed as a stage change announcement effect.

  In step S1625-6, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change announcement effect determined in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the start of the first suspension variable display. If the timing data SCY11 in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) has been selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately after the start of the variable display of the first hold (S1625-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-7. When it is not immediately after the start of the variable display of the first hold (S1625-6: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-9.

  In step S1625-7, the sub CPU 120a sets 1 to a stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. The stage change notice standby counter is a counter that indicates the remaining variable display count until the stage change notice effect is executed. In the next step S1625-8, the sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately after the start of fluctuation in the timing flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c immediately after the start of fluctuation. The timing flag immediately after the start of the fluctuation is a flag indicating that the execution timing of the stage change announcement effect is immediately after the start of the fluctuation display. Thereafter, the stage change announcement effect selection process ends.

  In step S1625-9, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change announcement effect determined in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination process is immediately before the stop of the first suspension variable display. If the timing data SCY12 in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately before the stop of the variable display of the first hold (S1625-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-10. If it is not immediately before the stop of the variable display of the first hold (S1625-9: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-12.

  In step S1625-10, sub CPU 120a sets 1 to a stage change notice standby counter of sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-11, the sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately before the stop in the sub RAM 120c in the timing flag storage area immediately before the stop. The timing flag immediately before the stop of the fluctuation is a flag indicating that the execution timing of the stage change announcement effect is immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display. Thereafter, the stage change announcement effect selection process ends.

  In step S1625-12, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change announcement effect determined in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the stop of the first suspension variable display. If the timing data SCY13 in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) has been selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately after the stop of the first hold variable display (S1625- 12: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625- 13. If it is not immediately after the stop of the first hold variable display (S1625- 12: No), the process proceeds to step S1625- 14.

  In step S1625-13, the sub CPU 120a sets 1 to a stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, without setting any timing flag, the present stage change announcement effect selection process ends.

  In step S1625-14, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change announcement effect determined in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the start of the second hold variable display. If the timing data SCY21 in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately after the start of the variable display of the second hold (S1625-14: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-15. If it is not immediately after the start of the variable display of the second hold (S1625- 14: No), the process proceeds to step S1625- 17.

  In step S1625-15, the sub CPU 120a sets 2 to a stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-16, the sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately after the start of fluctuation in the timing flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c immediately after the start of fluctuation. Thereafter, the stage change announcement effect selection process ends.

  In step S1625-17, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change announcement effect determined in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination process is immediately before the stop of the second hold variable display. If the timing data SCY22 in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately before the stop of the change display of the second hold (S1625-17: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-18. If it is not immediately before the stop of the variable display of the second hold (S1625-17: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-20.

  In step S1625-18, the sub CPU 120a sets 2 to a stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-19, the sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop in the timing flag storage area immediately before the fluctuation stop of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the stage change announcement effect selection process ends.

  In step S1625-20, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change announcement effect determined in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the stoppage of the second suspension variable display. If the timing data SCY23 in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) has been selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately after the stoppage of the variable display of the second hold (S1625-20: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-21. If it is not immediately after the stop of the change display of the second hold (S1625- 20: No), the process proceeds to step S1625- 22 in FIG.

  In step S1625-21, the sub CPU 120a sets 2 to a stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, without setting any timing flag, the present stage change announcement effect selection process ends.

  In step S1625-22 of FIG. 119, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change announcement effect determined in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the start of the third hold variable display. If the timing data SCY31 in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately after the start of the variable display of the third hold (S1625-22: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-23. If it is not immediately after the start of the variable display of the third hold (S1625-22: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-25.

  In step S1625-23, sub CPU 120a sets 3 to the stage change notice standby counter of sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-24, the sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately after the start of fluctuation in the timing flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c immediately after the start of fluctuation. Thereafter, the stage change announcement effect selection process ends.

  In step S1625-25, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change announcement effect determined in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination process is immediately before the stop of the variable display of the third hold. If the timing data SCY32 in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) has been selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When it is immediately before the stop of the change display of the third hold (S1625-25: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-26. If it is not immediately before the stop of the change display of the third hold (S1625- 25: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-28.

  In step S1625-26, sub CPU 120a sets 3 to the stage change notice standby counter of sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-27, the sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately before the stop in the timing flag storage area immediately before the stop in the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the stage change announcement effect selection process ends.

  In step S1625-28, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change announcement effect determined in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the stop of the third suspension variable display. If the timing data SCY33 in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately after the stop of the variable display of the third hold (S1625-28: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-29. When it is not immediately after the stop of the change display of the third hold (S1625-28: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-30.

  In step S1625-29, the sub CPU 120a sets 3 to the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, without setting any timing flag, the present stage change announcement effect selection process ends.

  In step S1625-30, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change announcement effect determined in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the start of the fourth suspension variable display. If the timing data SCY41 in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) has been selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately after the start of the variable display of the fourth hold (S1625-30: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-31. When it is not immediately after the start of the fourth hold variable display (S1625-30: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-33.

  In step S1625-31, the sub CPU 120a sets 4 to the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-32, the sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately after the start of the fluctuation in the timing flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c immediately after the start of the fluctuation. Thereafter, the stage change announcement effect selection process ends.

  In step S1625-33, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change announcement effect determined in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination process is immediately before the stop of the fourth hold variable display. If the timing data SCY42 in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When it is immediately before the stop of the change display of the fourth hold (S1625-33: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-34. If it is not immediately before the stop of the fourth hold variable display (S1625-33: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-36.

  In step S1625-34, sub CPU 120a sets 4 to the stage change notice standby counter of sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-35, the sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop in the timing flag storage area immediately before the fluctuation stop of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the stage change announcement effect selection process ends.

  In step S1625-36, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change announcement effect determined in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the stop of the fourth-hold variable display. If the timing data SCY43 in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) has been selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately after the stop of the fourth-hold variable display (S1625-36: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-37. If it is not immediately after the stop of the fourth-hold fluctuation display (S1625-36: No), the current stage change announcement effect selection process ends.

  In step S1625-37, the sub CPU 120a sets 4 to the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, without setting any timing flag, the present stage change announcement effect selection process ends.

  FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the details of the stage change announcement effect control process (step S1669 in FIG. 92) during the symbol change. In FIG. 122, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stage change notice waiting flag is set in the stage change notice waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1669-1). In the stage change announcement effect execution determination process (S1625-4 in FIG. 117) in the stage change announcement effect selection process, if the stage change announcement wait flag is set, the determination result in this step is “Yes”. When the stage change notice standby flag is set (S1669-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1669-2. When the stage change notice standby flag is not set (S1669-1: No), the stage change notice effect control process during the current symbol change is ended.

  In step S1669-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c is 1 or more. When the stage change notice standby counter is 1 or more (S1669-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a ends the present stage change notice effect during symbol change control process. If the stage change notice standby counter is 0 (S1669-2: No), the process proceeds to step S1669-3.

  In step S1669-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is set in the timing flag storage area immediately before the fluctuation stop of the sub RAM 120c. If the timing data SCY12, SCY22, SCY32, or SCY42 of the execution timing immediately before the stop of the fluctuation is selected in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination process (S1625-5 in FIG. 117) in the stage change announcement effect selection process, The determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is set (S1669-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1669-8. If the timing flag just before the fluctuation stop is not set (S1669-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1669-4.

  In step S1669-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the timing flag immediately after the start of the fluctuation is set in the timing flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c immediately after the start of the fluctuation. If the timing data SCY11, SCY21, SCY31, or SCY41 of the execution timing immediately after the start of the fluctuation is selected in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination process (S1625-5 in FIG. 117) in the stage change announcement effect selection process, The determination result of this step is “Yes”. If the timing data SCY13, SCY23, SCY33, or SCY43 of the execution timing immediately after the stop of the fluctuation is selected, the determination result of this step is “No”. When the timing flag is set immediately after the start of the change (S1669-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1669-5. When the timing flag is not set immediately after the start of the change (S1669-4: No), the stage change announcement effect control process during the current symbol change is ended.

  In step S1669-5, sub CPU 120a obtains a new stage after the change in the stage change based on the stage data in the effect information storage area, sets a character relating to the new stage as an appearance character, and performs a stage change in which this character appears. An effect pattern designating command for the notice effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern designating command is set in the transmission buffer. In the next step S1669-6, the sub CPU 120a clears the stage change notice waiting flag in the stage change notice waiting flag storage area. In the next step 1667-7, the sub CPU 120a clears the timing flag immediately after the start of the change. Thereafter, the stage change announcement effect control process during the current symbol change is ended.

  In step S1669-8, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until a predetermined timing immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display, and sets a value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds in the timer counter of the sub RAM 120c just before the fluctuation stop. Thereafter, the stage change announcement effect control process during the current symbol change is ended. The timer counter just before the fluctuation stop is counted down in the timer update process (S1500 in FIG. 89), and becomes 0 at a predetermined timing immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display.

  Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1669-8, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 immediately (immediately after the start of the fluctuation display) perform the stage change announcement effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device. 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c and the effect lighting device 34 are executed.

  FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing details of the symbol change stage change announcement effect control process (step S1672 in FIG. 93). In FIG. 123, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stage change notice waiting flag is set in the stage change notice waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1672-1). If the stage change notice standby flag is set (S1672-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1672-2. When the stage change notice standby flag is not set (S1672-1: No), the stage change notice effect control process during the current symbol stop is ended.

  In step S1672-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c is 1 or more. When the stage change notice standby counter is 1 or more (S1672-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1672-3. If the stage change notice standby counter is 0 (S1672-2: No), the process proceeds to step S1672-4.

  In step S1672-3, the sub CPU 120a updates the stage change notice standby counter of the sub RAM 120c by -1. Then, the stage change notice effect control process during the current symbol stop is terminated.

  In step S1672-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is set in the timing flag storage area immediately before the fluctuation stop of the sub RAM 120c. If the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is set (S1672-4: Yes), the stage change notice effect production control process during the current symbol stop is ended. If the timing flag just before the fluctuation stop is not set (S1672-4: No), the process proceeds to step S1672-5.

  In step S1672-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the timing flag immediately after the start of the fluctuation is set in the timing flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c immediately after the start of the fluctuation. When the timing flag is set immediately after the start of the change (S1672-5: Yes), the stage change effect control processing during the current symbol change is ended. If the timing flag has not been set immediately after the start of the change (S1672-5: No), the process proceeds to step S1672-6.

  In step S1672-6, the sub CPU 120a obtains a new stage after the change in the stage change, generates a character relating to the new stage as an appearance character, and generates an effect pattern designation command of a stage change announcement effect in which the character appears, and generates the command. The effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. In the next step S1672-7, the sub CPU 120a clears the stage change notice waiting flag in the stage change notice waiting flag storage area. After that, the current mode effect control process ends.

  Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1672-6, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 immediately (immediately after stopping the fluctuation display) display the stage change announcement effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device. 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c and the effect lighting device 34 are executed.

  FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the details of the special game effect selection process (step S1691 in FIG. 93). In FIG. 124, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of the jackpot that has triggered the current special game is the 2R probability change hit (S1691-1). When the type of the jackpot is the 2R probability change hit (S1691-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1691-2. When it is not the 2R probability change hit (S1691-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1691-3.

  In step S1691-2, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the opening effect per 2R, and stores the information of the opening effect pattern per 2R in the effect pattern storage area.

  In step S1691-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of the big hit that has triggered the current special game is the 16R certain change hit. When the type of the jackpot is the 16R probability change hit (S1691-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1691-4. If it is not the 16R probability change (S1691-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1691-5.

  In step S1691-4, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the opening effect per 16R, and stores the information of the opening effect pattern per 16R in the effect pattern storage area.

  In step S1691-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of the jackpot that has triggered the special game this time is the 8R probability change hit. When the type of the jackpot is the 8R probability change hit (S1691-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1691-6. If it is 8R normal winning (S1691-5: No), the process proceeds to step S1691-7.

  In step S1691-6, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the rank-up success effect, and executes the rank-up effect execution indicating that the rank-up success effect is to be executed in the fourth-round effect information storage area of the fourth RAM of the sub RAM 120c. Store the data.

  In step S1691-7, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the rank-up failure effect, and executes the rank-up effect execution indicating that the rank-up failure effect is to be executed in the effect information storage area for each round of the fourth round of the sub RAM 120c. Store the data.

  After execution of step S1691-6 or S1691-7, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform an opening effect per 8R, and stores the information of the opening effect pattern per 8R in the effect pattern storage area (S1691-8).

  In step S1691-9, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command of the opening effect determined in step S1691-2, S1691-4, or S1691-8 in the transmission buffer. After that, the current special game selection process ends.

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing details of the round effect control process (step S1693 in FIG. 93). In FIG. 125, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the round start command in the reception buffer is for the fourth round (S1693-1). If the round start command in the reception buffer is for the fourth round (S1693-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-2. If it is a round other than the fourth round (S1693-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1963-6.

  In step S1693-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not rank-up effect execution data is stored in the effect information storage area for each round of the sub RAM 120c. When rank-up effect execution data is stored (S1693-2: Yes), sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-3. If rank-up effect execution data is not stored (S1693-2: No), the process proceeds to step S1693-6.

  In step S1693-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the rank-up effect execution data in the round-specific effect information storage area indicates execution of a rank-up successful effect or indicates execution of a rank-up failure effect. judge. When the rank-up effect execution data indicates execution of the rank-up success effect (S1693-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-4. When the rank-up effect execution data indicates the execution of the rank-up failure effect (S1693-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1693-5.

  In step S1693-4, the sub CPU 120a sets a rank-up successful effect standby flag in the rank-up effect successful standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1693-5. The rank-up success effect waiting flag is a flag indicating that the execution of the rank-up success effect is waiting.

  In step S1693-5, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time up to the start time of the operation acceptance valid period in the rank-up effect of the current round (the fourth round), and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to obtain a value obtained by dividing the time by 2 milliseconds. Is set in the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the rank-up effect. Also, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time of the operation acceptance valid period in the rank up effect of the current round, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to obtain the value of the operation acceptance for rank up effect in the sub RAM 120c. Set to the period end timer counter. The operation reception valid period start timer counter and the operation reception valid period end timer counter are decremented each time the timer updating process in step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception valid period. The operation reception valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the end time of the operation reception valid period.

  In step S1693-6, the sub CPU 120a sets an effect pattern designation command of the round effect of the current round in the transmission buffer.

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing details of the special training mode start control process (step S1697 in FIG. 93). In FIG. 126, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the special training mode execution flag is set in the special training mode execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1697-1). When the special training mode execution flag is not set (S1697-1: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1697-1. If the special training mode in progress flag is set (S1697-1: Yes), the process skips step S1697-2 and proceeds to the next step S1697-3.

  In step S1697-2, the sub CPU 120a sets the special training mode execution flag in the special training mode execution flag storage area. In the next step S1697-3, the sub CPU 120a sets 100 to the remaining special training mode counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1697-4, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specifying command for an effect in the special training mode, and sets the generated effect pattern specifying command in the transmission buffer.

  Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1697-4, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 display an effect related to the display of the background image in the special training mode in the subsequent symbol change effect, using the image display device 31, The sound output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34 are executed.

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing details of the live mode start control process (step S1698 in FIG. 93). In FIG. 127, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the special training mode executing flag is set in the special training mode executing flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1698-1). When the special training mode execution flag is not set (S1698-1: No), the sub CPU 120a ends the current live mode start control process. If the special training mode execution flag is set (S1698-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1697-2.

  In step S1698-2, the sub CPU 120a clears the special training mode executing flag in the special training mode executing flag storage area. In the next step S1698-3, the sub CPU 120a clears the special training mode remaining number counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1698-4, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specifying command for an effect in the live mode, and sets the generated effect pattern specifying command in the transmission buffer.

  Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1698-4, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 display the effects related to the display of the background image in the live mode in the subsequent symbol variation effects, on the image display device 31, The sound output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device 34 are executed.

  FIGS. 128, 129, and 130 are flowcharts showing details of the effect input control process (step S1700 in FIG. 89). In FIG. 128, the sub CPU 120a performs an operation information storage area update process (S1701). The operation information storage area update processing is processing for updating information in the operation information storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

  FIG. 131A shows the operation information storage area. FIG. 131B is a diagram illustrating an example of updating the operation information storage area. As shown in FIG. 131A, the operation information storage area includes an upper cursor key sampling signal storage area, a lower cursor key sampling signal storage area, a left cursor key sampling signal storage area, a right cursor key sampling signal storage area, and a center key. It has a sampling signal storage area, an effect button sampling signal storage area, an effect button on edge storage area, an effect button off edge storage area, an effect button off edge number storage area, and an effect button on-off edge signal number storage area. .

  Each of the effect button sampling signal storage area, the effect button on-edge storage area, the effect button off-edge storage area, the effect button off-edge number storage area, and the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area each include information on the latest sampling timing. And a pre-sampling storage unit for storing information on the immediately preceding (two milliseconds before) sampling timing.

  In the operation information storage area update processing, the sub CPU 120a updates the up cursor key sampling signal storage area based on the input signal of the detection switch 39a of the up cursor key 39A. Further, based on the input signal of the detection switch 39b of the down cursor key 39B, the down cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated. Further, the left cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39c of the left cursor key 39C. Also, the right cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39d of the right cursor key 39D. Also, the central key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39e of the central key 39E. Further, based on the input signal of the detection switch 35a of the effect button 35, the effect button sampling signal storage area, the effect button on-edge storage area, the effect button off-edge storage area, and the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area are updated. I do.

  More specifically, at the sampling timing every 2 milliseconds, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the upper cursor key sampling signal storage area if the input signal of the detection switch 39a is ON, and turns off the input signal of the detection switch 39a. If it is, 0 is written to the upper cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39b is ON, 1 is written to the lower cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39b is OFF, 0 is written to the lower cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39c is ON, 1 is written to the left cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39c is OFF, 0 is written to the left cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39d is ON, 1 is written to the right cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39d is OFF, 0 is written to the right cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39e is ON, 1 is written in the central key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39e is OFF, 0 is written in the central key sampling signal storage area.

  The sub CPU 120a stores the information of the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area, the effect button on-edge storage area, the effect button off-edge storage area, and the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area in the previous sampling storage unit. Copy each one. Then, as shown in the update example of FIG. 131 (b), if the input signal of the detection switch 35a is ON, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage section of the effect button sampling signal storage area, and the detection switch 35a If the input signal is OFF, 0 is written to the latest sampling storage section of the effect button sampling signal storage area. If the previous sampling signal storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area is 0 and the latest sampling storage unit is 1, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button on-edge signal storage area, and other combinations If the previous sampling signal is 1 → the latest sampling signal is 1, the previous sampling signal is 0 → the latest sampling signal is 0, or the previous sampling signal is 1 → the latest sampling signal is 0, the effect button on-edge signal storage area Is written to the latest sampling storage unit of.

  If the previous sampling signal storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area is 1 and the latest sampling storage unit is 0, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button off-edge signal storage area, and other combinations If the previous sampling signal is 1 → the latest sampling signal is 1, the previous sampling signal is 0 → the latest sampling signal is 0, or the previous sampling signal is 0 → the latest sampling signal is 1, the effect button off-edge signal storage area Is written to the latest sampling storage unit of.

  If the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage section of the production button sampling signal storage area, the sub CPU 120a rewrites the number of the latest sampling storage section of the production button on-off edge signal number storage area to a value obtained by adding +1 to the production button sampling signal. When 0 is written to the latest sampling storage section of the signal storage area, the latest sampling storage section of the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is reset to 0.

  In step S1702 of FIG. 128, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the dialog operation effect operation result standby flag is set in the dialog operation effect operation result standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. If the speech operation effect operation result standby flag is set (S1702: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1703. If the serif operation effect operation result standby flag is not set (S1702: No), the process proceeds to step S1708 in FIG.

  In step S1703, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance effective period start timer counter for the line operation effect is 0. After the start time of the operation acceptance effective period of the line operation effect, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1703: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1704. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1703: No), the process proceeds to step S1708 in FIG.

  In step S1704, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance effective period end timer counter for the line operation effect is 0. If it is within the operation acceptance effective period of the line operation effect, the determination result of this step is “No”, and at the end time of the operation acceptance effective period of the line operation effect, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1704: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1705. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1707.

  In step S1705, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit of the effect button on-edge storage area. If immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When 1 has been written (S1705: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1706. If 1 has not been written (S1705: No), the process proceeds to step S1710 in FIG.

  In step S1706, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, an operation designation command for instructing the progress of the dialogue operation effect to the operation result. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1707. In step S1707, the sub CPU 120a clears the dialogue operation effect operation result standby flag in the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1708.

  Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1706, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 produce an operation result of the speech operation effect (the dialogue speaker determination process in the speech operation effect operation result determination process (FIG. 104, the character determined in S1652-1) appears, and the dialogue determination process (the effect of speaking the dialogue determined in S1652-2 in FIG. 104) is performed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the production drive device. 33a, 33b, 33c, and the lighting device 34 for production.

  In step S1708 of FIG. 129, the sub CPU 120a checks whether the challenge effect (success) standby flag is set in the challenge effect (success) standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. If the challenge effect (success) standby flag is set (S1708: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1709. If the challenge effect (success) standby flag is not set (S1708: No), the process proceeds to step S1716.

  In step S1709, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation acceptance effective period start timer counter for the challenge effect is 0. After the start time of the operation acceptance valid period of the challenge effect, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1709: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1710. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1709: No), the process proceeds to step S1716.

  In step S1710, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance effective period end timer counter for the challenge effect is 0. If it is within the operation accepting validity period of the challenge effect, the determination result of this step is “No”, and at the end time of the operation accepting validity period of the challenge effect, the judgment result of this step is “Yes”. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1710: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1711. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1710: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1712.

  In step S1711, the sub CPU 120a determines whether 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit of the effect button on-edge storage area. If immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When 1 has been written (S1711: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1712. If 1 has not been written (S1711: No), the process proceeds to step S1716.

  In step S1712, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the first accessory descent standby flag is set in the first accessory descent standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. If the first character descent waiting flag is set (S1712: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1713. If the first accessory drop waiting flag has not been set (S1712: No), the process proceeds to step S1716.

  In step S1713, the sub CPU 120a sets an operation designation command instructing progress to the operation result in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1714.

  Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1713, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the challenge revival effect (the operation of the first movable role 330a, the display of the short hit notification effect image, and the short hit notification. Effect with output of effect sound) is executed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device.

  In step S1714, the sub CPU 120a clears the challenge effect (success) standby flag in the challenge effect (success) standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1715, the sub CPU 120a clears the first accessory descent standby flag in the first accessory descent standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1716.

  In step S1716, the sub CPU 120a checks whether the surprise operation effect standby flag is set in the surprise operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. When the surprise operation effect standby flag is set (S1716: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1717. If the surprise operation effect standby flag has not been set (S1716: No), the process proceeds to step S1724 in FIG.

  In step S1717, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation reception effective period start timer counter for the surprise operation effect is 0 or not. After the start time of the operation acceptance valid period of the surprise operation effect, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1717: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1718. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1717: No), the process proceeds to step S1724 in FIG.

  In step S1718, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation acceptance effective period end timer counter for the surprise operation effect is 0. If it is within the operation reception validity period of the surprise operation effect, the determination result of this step is “No”, and at the end time of the operation reception validity period of the surprise operation effect, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1718: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1719. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1718: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1720.

  In step S1719, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage section of the effect button on-edge storage area. If immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When 1 has been written (S1719: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1720. If 1 has not been written (S1719: No), the process proceeds to step S1724 in FIG.

  In step S1720, sub CPU 120a confirms whether the first accessory descent standby flag is set in the first accessory descent standby flag storage area of sub RAM 120c. If the first role drop waiting flag has been set (S1720: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1721. If the first character descent waiting flag is not set (S1720: No), the process proceeds to step S1724 in FIG.

  In step S1721, the sub CPU 120a sets an operation designation command for instructing the progress of the surprise operation effect to the operation result in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1722.

  In step S1722, the sub CPU 120a clears the surprise operation effect standby flag in the surprise operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1723, the sub CPU 120a clears the first accessory descent standby flag in the first accessory descent standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1724 in FIG.

  Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1721, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 produce an operation result of the surprise operation effect (operation of the first movable role 330a, display of the jackpot notification effect image, And the effect with the output of the jackpot notification effect sound) are executed by the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting device.

  In step S1724 of FIG. 130, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance effective period start timer counter for rank-up effect is 0. After the start time of the operation acceptance valid period of the continuous hit effect in the rank-up effect, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1724: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1725. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1724: No), the process proceeds to step S1735.

  In step S1725, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception effective period end timer counter for rank-up effect is 0. If it is within the operation acceptance valid period of the rank-up effect, the determination result of this step is “No”, and at the end time of the operation acceptance effective period, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1725: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1726. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1725: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1731.

  In step S1726, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The predetermined value in this step is a value obtained by dividing a period (for example, 1 second) sufficient for determining that the effect button 35 is continuously operated (pressed and held) by 2 milliseconds. I do. If the effect button 35 is continuously operated (pressed and held) for one second or more, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is less than the predetermined value (S1726: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1727. When the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is equal to or more than the predetermined value (S1726: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1735.

  In step S1727, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage section of the effect button on-edge storage area. If immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If 1 has been written (S1727: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1728. If 0 has been written (S1727: No), the process proceeds to step S1735.

In step S1728, the sub CPU 120a updates the number of consecutive hits N _RD in the number of consecutive hits storage area of the sub RAM 120c by +1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1729.

In step S1729, the sub CPU120a determines whether battered number _{N RD} updated reaches 30. If the number of presses of the effect button 35 after the display of the guidance image of “continuous hit!” Reaches 30 times, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. The determination result is “No”. Sub CPU120a, when repeated pressing the number _{N RD} has not reached 30 (S1729: No), the process proceeds to step S1730. If the number of consecutive hits N _RD has reached 30 (S1729: Yes), the flow proceeds to step S1731.

  In step S1730, sub CPU 120a sets an effect progress designation command in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1734.

  Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1730, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform an effect of advancing the gauge development amount of the gauge image rightward by a predetermined amount to the image display device 31 and the audio output device 32. , The effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c and the effect lighting device 34.

  In step S1731, it is confirmed whether or not the rank-up successful effect standby flag is set in the rank-up successful effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The rank-up success rendering standby flag is set at the start of the round game of the fourth round in the special game per 8R probability change. If the rank-up success rendering standby flag is set (S1731: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to Step S1732. If the rank-up success rendering standby flag has not been set (S1731: No), the flow proceeds to step S1733.

  In step S1732, the sub CPU 120a sets a rank-up failure effect designation command instructing execution of the rank-up failure effect in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1735.

  Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1732, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 display the rank-up failure effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, and 33c. , And the effect lighting device 34 are executed.

  In step S1733, the sub CPU 120a sets a rank-up success effect designation command instructing execution of the rank-up success effect in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1734.

  Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1733, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 display a successful rank-up effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, and 33c. , And the effect lighting device 34 are executed.

  In step S1734, the sub CPU 120a clears the rank-up effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1735.

  In step S1735, the sub CPU 120a generates an operation designation command according to the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, or the center key 39E, and sets the generated operation designation command in the transmission buffer.

  Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1729, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 execute an effect according to the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, or the center key 39E.

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing details of the timer update process (step S1500 in FIG. 89). In FIG. 132, the sub CPU 120a updates the timer counter of the sub RAM 120c by decrementing it by -1 if it is not 0 (S1501).

  In the next step S1502, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stage change notice standby counter of sub RAM 120c is 1 or more. When the stage change notice standby counter is 1 or more (S1502: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1503. If the stage change notice standby counter is 0 (S1502: No), the current timer update process ends.

  In the next step S1503, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is set in the timing flag storage area immediately before the fluctuation stop of the sub RAM 120c. In the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination process (S1625-5 in FIG. 117) in the stage change announcement effect selection process, the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is set as the first, second, and third suspension times when the process is executed. Or, when the timing data SCY12, SCY22, SCY32, or SCY42 of the execution timing immediately before the stop of the fluctuation of the fourth hold fluctuation is selected, the stage announcement effect control during the symbol fluctuation when the fluctuation digestion proceeds to the fluctuation. It is set in the processing (S1669-8 in FIG. 122). When the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is set (S1503: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1504. If the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is not set (S1503: No), the current timer update process ends.

  In the next step S1504, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timer counter just before the fluctuation stop of the sub RAM 120c is 0. If the timer counter just before the fluctuation stop is 0 (S1504: Yes), and if the ima counter is not 0 (S1504: No), the current timer updating process is ended.

  In the next step S1505, the sub CPU 120a obtains a new stage after the change in the stage change, generates a character relating to the new stage as an appearance character, and generates an effect pattern designation command of a stage change announcement effect in which this character appears, and generates The effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. In the next step S1506, the sub CPU 120a clears the stage change notice waiting flag in the stage change notice waiting flag storage area. In the next step 1667-7, the sub CPU 120a clears the timing flag immediately before the start of the change. Thereafter, the stage change announcement effect control process during the current symbol change is ended.

  Upon receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1505, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 immediately (immediately before stopping the fluctuation display) perform the stage change announcement effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, The effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c and the effect lighting device 34 are executed.

  The above is the details of the present embodiment. According to the present embodiment, cooperation between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120 in the gaming machine 1 can be performed smoothly.

<Second embodiment>
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the first embodiment, the effect control board 120 is configured to perform the change display immediately before and immediately after the stop of the change display immediately before the change display that is to perform the stage change, and the change display that is to perform the stage change. The stage change announcement effect is executed at any timing immediately after the start of the game. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 120 performs the stage change announcement effect indicating that the stage change is to be performed in the variable display only at the timing immediately after the start of the variable display in which the stage change is to be performed. Enable execution.

  FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a stage change announcement effect execution timing determination table referred to in the stage change announcement effect execution timing determination process (S1625-5 in FIG. 117) in the stage change announcement effect selection process. In the table of FIG. 133, when the stage change is performed during the first suspension variable display, the selectivity of the timing data SCY12 and SCY13 other than the timing data SCY11 whose execution timing is immediately after the start of the first suspension variable display is 0. %It has become. In the case where the stage is changed during the fluctuation display of the second hold, the selectivity of the timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY22, and SCY23 other than the timing data SCY21 whose execution timing is immediately after the start of the fluctuation display of the second hold is 0. %It has become. When the stage is changed during the third hold variation display, the timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY22, SCY23, SCY32 other than the timing data SCY31 having the execution timing immediately after the start of the third hold variation display are used. The selectivity of SCY33 is 0%. When the stage is changed during the fourth hold variation display, the timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY22, SCY23, SCY31 other than the timing data SCY41 whose execution timing is immediately after the start of the fourth hold variation display. The selectivity of SCY32, SCY33, SCY42, and SCY43 is 0%.

  According to the present embodiment, the execution of the stage change announcement effect at a timing other than the timing immediately after the start of the fluctuation display that is to change the stage is restricted. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the enjoyment of the performance accompanying the stage change.

<Third embodiment>
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the contents of the command execution mode determination table in the sub-ROM 120b are different from those of the first and second embodiments.

  FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1146-1 of the special command analysis process during setting change in FIG. The content of the record of each special command in the command execution mode determination table in FIG. 134 is such that when a special command is received during the display of the setting change notification image in the setting change mode, the setting change notification is performed regardless of whether background music is stopped. The image is erased to make it invisible.

  More specifically, in the record of the “full tank error command” in the table of FIG. 134, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “Δ”, and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is “erasing required”. ", The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is"-", and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is" stopped ". In the record of the “full tank error clearing command”, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “〇”, the data indicating necessity of erasing the image is “erased”, and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is indicated. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is a full tank error command, the image control board 150 deletes the setting change notification image. Then, a message image corresponding to the full tank error command is displayed in the center of the screen. Further, in this case, the output of the background music during the start is stopped, and the message sound corresponding to the full tank error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 is a full tank error clearing command after that, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the full tank error command and makes the setting change notification image visible again, and The output of the message sound corresponding to the full tank error command is stopped.

  In the record of the “door open error command” in the table of FIG. 134, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “Δ”, the data indicating whether the image needs to be erased is “erased”, and the image corresponding to the command is deleted. Is "-", and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop". In the record of the “door open error clearing command”, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “Δ”, the data indicating whether the image needs to be erased is “erased”, and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is indicated. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop".

  Therefore, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 136, the image control board 150 deletes the setting change notification image when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is a door opening error command, A message image corresponding to the door open error command is displayed in the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during the startup is maintained, and the message sound corresponding to the door open error command is output. If the command subsequently received by the effect control board 120 is a door opening error clearing command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the door opening error command and makes the setting change notification image visible again, The output of the message voice corresponding to the release error command is stopped.

  In the record of the “magnet detection error command” in the table of FIG. 134, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “Δ”, the data indicating whether the image needs to be erased is “erased”, and the image corresponding to the command is deleted. Is "-", and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is "stopped". In the record of the “magnet detection error clearing command”, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “〇”, the data indicating whether the image needs to be erased is “erased”, and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is indicated. The indicated data is “−”, and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is “stopped”.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 137, the image control board 150 deletes the setting change notification image when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is a magnet detection error command, A message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command is displayed at the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during the start is stopped, and the message voice corresponding to the magnet detection error command is output. If the command subsequently received by the effect control board 120 is a magnet detection error clearing command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command and makes the setting change notification image visible again, The output of the message voice corresponding to the detection error command is stopped.

  In the record of the “power-on designation command” in the table of FIG. 134, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “Δ”, the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is “erased”, and the image corresponding to the command is deleted. Is "-", and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 138, the image control board 150 erases the setting change notification image when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is the power-on designation command, A message image corresponding to the power-on designation command is displayed in the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during the startup is maintained.

  In the record of the “power restoration specification command” in the table of FIG. 134, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “Δ”, the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is “erased”, and the image corresponding to the command is deleted. Is "-", and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop".

  Therefore, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 139, the image control board 150 erases the setting change notification image when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is the power restoration designation command, A message image corresponding to the power restoration designation command is displayed in the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during the startup is maintained.

  FIG. 140 is a view showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1147-1 of the game command analysis process during setting change in FIG. 70. The content of the record of each game command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 140 is such that when a game command is received during the display of the setting change notification image in the setting change mode, the setting change notification is performed regardless of whether the background music is stopped. The display of the image is maintained.

  More specifically, in the record of the “variation start command” in the table of FIG. 140, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “〇”, the data indicating whether the image is to be erased is “no erasure”, The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “−”, and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is “stopped”.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 141, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is the change start command, the image control board 150 displays the setting change notification image on the image display device 31. Is maintained, and the symbol variation image corresponding to the variation start command is displayed over the character “Setting is being changed” at the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during the start is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the fluctuation start command is output.

  In the record of the "start winning designation command" in the table of FIG. 140, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is "x", the data indicating whether the image needs to be erased is "no erasure", and the image corresponding to the command is displayed. Is "-", and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 142, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is the start winning designation command, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting change notification image. Then, the display of the effect image corresponding to the start winning designation command is restricted. Further, in this case, the output of the background music during the startup is maintained, and the output of the effect sound corresponding to the start winning designation command is regulated. That is, when the start winning designation command is received during the display of the setting change notification image, the start winning designation command is ignored for the display of the image and the output of the sound.

  In the record of the “special game start command (opening designation command)” in the table of FIG. 140, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “Δ”, the data indicating the necessity of image erasure is “no erasure”, Data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", and data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 143, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is a special game start command (opening designation command), the image display board 150 At 31, the display of the setting change notification image is maintained, and the effect image corresponding to the special game start command (opening designation command) is displayed over the character “Setting is being changed” in the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during the startup is maintained, and the effect sound corresponding to the special game start command (opening designation command) is output.

  FIG. 144 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1156-1 of the special command analysis processing during setting confirmation in FIG. 77. The content of the record of each special command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 144 is such that when a special command is received while the setting confirmation notification image is being displayed in the setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation notification is performed regardless of whether the background music is stopped. The image is erased to make it invisible.

  Describing in more detail, in the record of the “full tank error command” in the table of FIG. 144, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is “Δ”, and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is “erasing required”. ", The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is"-", and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is" stopped ". In the record of the “full tank error clearing command”, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “〇”, the data indicating necessity of erasing the image is “erased”, and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is indicated. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 145, the image control board 150 deletes the setting confirmation notification image when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is a full tank error command. Then, a message image corresponding to the full tank error command is displayed in the center of the screen. Further, in this case, the output of the background music during the start is stopped, and the message sound corresponding to the full tank error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 is a full tank error clearing command after that, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the full tank error command and makes the setting confirmation notification image visible again, and The output of the message sound corresponding to the full tank error command is stopped.

  In the record of the “door open error command” in the table of FIG. 144, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “Δ”, the data indicating whether the image needs to be erased is “erased”, and the image corresponding to the command is deleted. Is "-", and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop". In the record of the “door open error clearing command”, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “Δ”, the data indicating whether the image needs to be erased is “erased”, and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is indicated. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 146, the image control board 150 erases the setting confirmation notification image when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is a door opening error command, A message image corresponding to the door open error command is displayed in the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during the startup is maintained, and the message sound corresponding to the door open error command is output. If the command subsequently received by the effect control board 120 is a door opening error clearing command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the door opening error command and makes the setting confirmation notification image visible again, The output of the message voice corresponding to the release error command is stopped.

  In the record of the “magnet detection error command” in the table of FIG. 144, the data indicating the necessity of executing the command itself is “Δ”, the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is “erased”, and the image corresponding to the command is deleted. Is "-", and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is "stopped". In the record of the “magnet detection error clearing command”, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “〇”, the data indicating whether the image needs to be erased is “erased”, and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is indicated. The indicated data is "-", and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 147, the image control board 150 deletes the setting confirmation notification image when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is a magnet detection error command, A message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command is displayed at the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during the start is stopped, and the message voice corresponding to the magnet detection error command is output. If the command subsequently received by the effect control board 120 is a magnet detection error clearing command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command and makes the setting confirmation notification image visually recognizable. The output of the message voice corresponding to the detection error command is stopped.

  In the record of the “power-on designation command” in the table of FIG. 144, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “$”, the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is “erased”, and the image corresponding to the command is deleted. Is "-", and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 148, when the command received during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is the power-on designation command, the image control board 150 deletes the setting confirmation notification image and turns on the power at the center of the screen. Display the message image corresponding to the specified command. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during the startup is maintained.

  In the record of the “power restoration specification command” in the table of FIG. 144, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “Δ”, the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is “erased”, and the image corresponding to the command is deleted. Is "-", and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 149, the image control board 150 deletes the setting confirmation notification image when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is the power restoration designation command, A message image corresponding to the power restoration designation command is displayed in the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during the startup is maintained.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1157-1 of the game command analysis processing during setting confirmation in FIG. 84. The content of the record of each game command in the command execution mode determination table in FIG. 150 is such that, when a game command is received during the display of the setting confirmation notification image in the setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation notification is performed regardless of whether the background music is stopped. The display of the image is maintained.

  More specifically, in the record of the “change start command” in the table of FIG. 150, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “○”, the data indicating the necessity of image erasure is “no The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “−”, and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is “stopped”.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 151, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is the change start command, the image control board 150 displays the setting confirmation notification image on the image display device 31. Is maintained, and a symbol variation image corresponding to the variation start command is superimposed and displayed on the character of “Setting is being confirmed” in the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during the start is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the fluctuation start command is output.

  In the record of the "start winning designation command" in the table of FIG. 150, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "x", the data indicating the necessity of erasure of the image is "no erasure", and the image corresponding to the command is displayed. Is "-", and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is "stopped".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 152, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is the start winning designation command, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting confirmation notification image. Then, the display of the effect image corresponding to the start winning designation command is restricted. Further, in this case, the output of the background music during the startup is maintained, and the output of the effect sound corresponding to the start winning designation command is regulated. That is, when the start winning designation command is received during the display of the setting confirmation notification image, the start winning designation command is ignored for the display of the image and the output of the sound.

  In the record of the "special game start command (opening designation command)" in the table of FIG. 150, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is "@", the data indicating whether the image is to be erased is "no erasure", Data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", and data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 153, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is the special game start command (opening designation command), the image display board 150 At 31, the display of the setting confirmation notification image is maintained, and a special game start command (opening designation command) and an effect image corresponding to the special game start command (opening designation command) are superimposed and displayed on the character “Setting Confirmation” in the center of the screen. In this case, the output of the background music during the start is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the special game start command (opening designation command) is output. According to the present embodiment, cooperation between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120 in the gaming machine 1 can be performed more smoothly.

<Fourth embodiment>
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the procedure for confirming the setting in the setting change mode is different from that in the first to third embodiments. In the first to third embodiments, the operation of turning off the power switch 172 in the setting change mode is the operation of determining the setting of the jackpot lottery. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the setting is determined by operating the setting key 177 and the RAM clear switch 174. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 154 (B), when it is desired to confirm the setting, the setting key 177 is returned from the ON state to the OFF state, and the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed while the power switch 127 is in the OFF state. . When this operation is performed, the setting corresponding to the number of monitors 178 at that time (setting 2 corresponding to “0002” in the example of FIG. 154 (B)) is determined as a new setting of the jackpot lottery probability. The setting information of the setting is written in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 110c. After this writing, the processing shifts to the customer waiting state without going through the power-off processing. Further, as shown in FIG. 155 (B), the operation of turning off the power switch 127 and restarting may be performed again without shifting from the setting change mode to the customer waiting state.

<Fifth embodiment>
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the configuration inside the cover 119 of the main control board 110 is different from that of the first to fourth embodiments (FIG. 23). As shown in FIG. 156, in this embodiment, a RAM clear switch 174, a setting switch 175, and a monitor 178 are provided inside the cover 119 of the main control board 110. The setting switch 175 is an operation unit that plays a role instead of the setting key 177 in the first to fourth embodiments.

  The procedure of the normal start operation, the RAM clear start operation, the first special start operation, and the second special start operation in the present embodiment is as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 157, in the normal startup operation, the setting switch 175 is turned off, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned off, and the power switch 172 is turned on. When a normal start operation is performed, the gaming machine 1 restores data in the main RAM 110c in an initialization process, and performs a normal mode process after the initialization process is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 158, in the RAM clear activation operation, the setting switch 175 is turned off, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned on, and the power switch 172 is turned on. When the RAM clear activation operation is performed, the gaming machine 1 clears the main RAM 110c in an initialization process, and performs a normal mode process after the initialization process is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 159 (A), in the first special startup operation, the setting switch 175 is turned on, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned off, and the power switch 172 is turned on. When the first special activation operation is performed, the gaming machine 1 performs a setting change mode process in the initialization process.

  As shown in FIG. 159 (B), when it is desired to change the setting of the jackpot lottery probability in the setting change mode, the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed. Every time the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed once, the number of monitors 178 changes cyclically as "0002" → "0003" → "0004" → "0005" → "0006" → "0001". When it is desired to determine the setting of the jackpot lottery probability, the power switch 172 is turned off.

  As shown in FIG. 160, in the second special activation operation, the setting switch 175 is turned on, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned on, and the power switch 172 is turned on. When the second special start-up operation is performed, the gaming machine 1 performs a setting confirmation mode process in the initialization process.

<Sixth embodiment>
A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the procedure for confirming the setting in the setting change mode is different from that in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, the operation of turning off the power switch 172 in the setting change mode is the operation of determining the setting of the jackpot lottery. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the setting is determined by operating the setting switch 175. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161 (B), when the user wants to confirm the setting, the user presses the setting switch 175 with the RAM clear switch 174 turned off and the power switch 127 turned on. When this operation is performed, the setting corresponding to the number of monitors 178 at that time (setting 2 corresponding to “0002” in the example of FIG. 161 (B)) is determined as a new setting of the jackpot lottery probability. The setting information of the setting is written in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 110c. After this writing, the processing shifts to the customer waiting state without going through the power-off processing. As shown in FIG. 162 (B), pressing the RAM clear switch 174 is an operation for changing the setting, pressing the setting switch 175 is an operation for confirming the setting, and the transition from the setting change mode to the customer waiting state is performed. Instead of performing the operation, the operation of turning off the power switch 127 and restarting may be performed again.

<Seventh embodiment>
A seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the operation of changing the setting and the operation of finalizing the setting in the setting change mode are opposite to those in the sixth embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 163 (B), pressing the setting switch 175 is an operation for changing the setting, pressing the RAM clear switch 174 is an operation for finalizing the setting, and after this finalizing operation, the customer wait state Move to As shown in FIG. 164 (B), pressing the setting switch 175 is an operation for changing the setting, pressing the RAM clear switch 174 is an operation for confirming the setting, and the transition from the setting change mode to the customer waiting state is performed. Instead of performing the operation, the operation of turning off the power switch 127 and restarting may be performed again.

<Eighth embodiment>
A seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1146-1 of the special command analysis process during setting change (FIG. 62) is different from those of the first to seventh embodiments. FIG. 165 is a diagram illustrating the command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1146-1. The content of the record of each special command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 165 is such that when a specific special command (magnet detection error command and vibration detection error command) is received while the setting change notification image is being displayed, the setting change notification is made. When the image is deleted and a special command other than the specific special command is received, the display of the setting change notification image is maintained.

  Specifically, in the record of the “magnet detection error command” and the “vibration detection error command” in the table of FIG. 165, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “Δ” and the necessity of erasing the image is indicated. The data is "erased". In other records, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “Δ”, and the data indicating whether the image needs to be deleted is “no deletion”.

<Ninth embodiment>
An eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1147-1 of the game command analysis processing during setting change (FIG. 70) is different from those of the first to eighth embodiments. FIG. 166 is a diagram illustrating the command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1147-1. The content of the record of each game command in the command execution mode determination table in FIG. 166 is such that when a specific game command (a change start command and an opening designation command) is received while the setting change notification image is being displayed, the setting change notification image is displayed. When a special command other than a specific game command is received after being erased, the display of the setting change notification image is maintained.

  Specifically, in the record of the “change start command” and the “opening designation command” in the table of FIG. 166, data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “Δ”, and data indicating whether the image needs to be erased is indicated. "Erased" is displayed. In other records, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “Δ”, and the data indicating whether the image needs to be deleted is “no deletion”.

<Tenth embodiment>
A ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1156-1 of the special command analysis processing during setting confirmation (FIG. 77) is different from that of the first to ninth embodiments. FIG. 167 is a diagram illustrating the command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1156-1. The content of the record of each special command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 167 is that when a specific special command (magnet detection error command and vibration detection error command) is received while the setting confirmation notification image is being displayed, the setting confirmation notification When the image is deleted and a special command other than the specific special command is received, the display of the setting confirmation notification image is maintained.

  Specifically, in the record of the “magnet detection error command” and the “vibration detection error command” in the table of FIG. 167, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “Δ” and the image indicates whether the image needs to be erased. The data is "erased". In other records, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “Δ”, and the data indicating whether the image needs to be deleted is “no deletion”.

<Eleventh embodiment>
A tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1157-1 of the game command analysis processing during setting confirmation (FIG. 84) is different from those of the first to tenth embodiments. FIG. 168 is a diagram illustrating the command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1157-1. The content of the record of each game command in the command execution mode determination table in FIG. 168 is such that when a specific game command (a change start command and an opening designation command) is received while the setting confirmation notification image is being displayed, the setting confirmation notification image is displayed. When a special command other than a specific game command is received after being erased, the display of the setting confirmation notification image is maintained.

  Specifically, in the record of the “change start command” and the “opening designation command” in the table of FIG. 167, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “Δ”, and the data indicating whether the image needs to be erased is indicated. "Erased" is displayed. In other records, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “Δ”, and the data indicating whether the image needs to be deleted is “no deletion”.

As described above, the first to eleventh embodiments of the present invention have been described, but the following modifications may be added to such embodiments.
(1) In the first to eleventh embodiments, the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine. However, the present invention may be applied to a slot machine.

(2) In S1146-6, S1147-6, S1156-6, and S11157-6 in the first to eleventh embodiments, an erasure designation command for instructing erasure of a display image (setting change notification image, setting confirmation notification image). Alternatively, a command may be set to instruct another image such as a single color image to be drawn on a layer above the drawing layer of the display image. As long as the command can make the display image invisible, a command for instructing deletion of the display image itself may be transmitted, or a command for instructing the display image to overwrite another image may be used. .

(3) In the first to eleventh embodiments, the display position of the message image corresponding to the command when the command is sent from the main control board 110 to the sub CPU 120a during the display of the setting change notification image or the setting confirmation notification image. Was either the center of the screen or the upper right corner of the screen. However, the display position of the message image may be the lower right corner, the upper left corner, or the lower left corner.

(4) In the first to eleventh embodiments, when the first special activation operation is performed, a setting change command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120, and the setting is triggered by the transmission of the setting change command. The change image was displayed. In addition, when the second special activation operation is performed, a setting confirmation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120, and a setting confirmation notification image is displayed upon transmission of the setting confirmation command. Was. However, when the first special start operation or the second special start operation is performed, the setting change command and the setting confirmation command are prevented from being transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120, and the setting change mode and the setting check mode are set. During this time, the game standby image (FIG. 57) may be kept displayed. Further, when a setting change command or a setting confirmation command is received while an image corresponding to the predetermined command is being displayed, the image corresponding to the predetermined command may be made invisible. When a setting change command or a setting confirmation command is received while an image corresponding to the predetermined command is being displayed, the display of the image corresponding to the predetermined command may be maintained.

(5) In the first to eleventh embodiments, in the record corresponding to the received command in the command execution mode determination table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “〇”, and the necessity of image deletion is indicated. If the data is "no erasure" and the data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "center", the data is received in such a manner that the characters of the setting change notification image and the setting confirmation notification image are partially visible. The command and the corresponding message image are displayed in a superimposed manner. However, the received command and the corresponding message image may be superimposed and displayed such that the characters of the setting change notification image and the setting confirmation notification image are completely hidden. In short, an image corresponding to the received command may be displayed on at least a part of the setting change notification image or the setting confirmation notification image.

(6) In the first to eleventh embodiments, the loss notice effect is executed with a predetermined probability only when the jackpot determination result is a loss. On the other hand, the loss notice effect may be executed as a part of a so-called contradictory effect. In this modified example, it is likely to be determined in a losing manner such as a losing reach effect (an effect in which the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are temporarily stopped in the losing mode and then in the losing mode), a challenge failure effect, and a battle failure effect. After the effect, the loss announcement effect may be executed with a predetermined probability only when the jackpot notification effect is executed through the execution of the surprise operation effect as the resurrection effect.

  According to this modified example, even when an out-of-office notice effect is executed, there is a case in which, with an extremely low probability, the process proceeds to the jackpot information effect via the surprise operation effect without directly proceeding to the loss information effect. Therefore, even when the shift notice effect is executed, the game can be advanced without impairing the player's expectation.

(7) In the first to eleventh embodiments, the line "..." is not selected when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, and the operation result "..." Is a losing notice effect informing that the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are fixed (completely stopped) in a losing mode. On the other hand, a losing notice effect that proceeds from the operation promoting effect to the line of "..." may be executed as a part of a so-called contradictory effect. In this modified example, after a loss notice effect that proceeds from the operation promotion effect to the operation result of “...”, an effect of temporarily stopping the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in a loss mode, a challenge failure effect, a battle failure Only when a performance that is likely to be fixed in a loss mode such as a failed performance is performed, and then a jackpot notification performance is performed through the execution of a surprise operation performance, which is a resurrection performance, the operation promotion performance is switched from the operation promotion performance with a predetermined probability to "... The effect that proceeds to the operation result of “.” May be executed.

  According to this modified example, even when an effect in which a line of “...” appears is executed, the process may proceed to the jackpot notification effect via the surprise operation effect without directly proceeding to the loss notification effect. Therefore, even when an effect in which the line of “...” Appears is executed, the game can be advanced without impairing the player's expectations.

(8) In the above-described first to eleventh embodiments, all the aspects of the stop before the determination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R during the variable display of the symbol are temporary stops (stops slightly shaking). there were. However, an effect in which the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are completely stopped in the reach mode and then changed again may be used as the reach effect before the symbol is fixed during the variable display. Further, the effect of completely stopping the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the losing mode and then re-changing the losing mode may be a losing temporary stop effect.

(9) In the first to eleventh embodiments, the live mode (the special mode to be shifted to when the winning is won in the probability change) is continued until the big hit is won again. However, the live mode may be repeated until the jackpot is won again, or the symbol may be continued without winning the jackpot until the number of symbol changes reaches a predetermined number.

(10) In the first to eleventh embodiments, when it is determined that the stage change is to be executed due to the fluctuation at the time of executing the stage change execution determining process (at the time of starting winning), the stage change announcement effect execution determining process is performed. The stage change notice production was not executed. However, even if a stage change is executed in the fluctuation, a stage change announcement effect may be executed before the stage change. In this case, only immediately after the start of the change, a stage change announcement effect for notifying that a stage change should be made in the change may be executed.

(10) In the first to eleventh embodiments, as the operation confirmation command generated by the debugging dedicated board, the factory shipping board, or the inspection personal computer and transmitted to the effect control board 120, the change start command and the magnet Commands for detection are listed. However, the commands generated by the debug-dedicated board, the board for factory shipment, or the personal computer for inspection include a design specification command, a special design holding number designation command, a fluctuation stop command, a customer waiting designation command, a start winning designation command, a round start command. , Opening specification command, ending specification command, game state specification command, power-on specification command, RAM clear specification command, power restoration specification command, full tank error command, counter case error command, counting switch disconnection error command, ballless error command , Payout excess error command, payout command error command, door open error command, switch not connected error command, abnormal winning error command, ejection error command, vibration detection error command, full tank error solution Command, counter case error clearing command, counting switch disconnection error clearing command, ballless error clearing command, payout excess error clearing command, payout command error clearing command, door open error clearing command, switch unconnected error clearing command, error winning error clearing The command may be one or more of a command, a discharge error clearing command, a magnet detection error clearing command, and a vibration detection error clearing command. In this case, the production control board 120 generates the command, irrespective of whether it is the main control board 110, or whether it is a debugging dedicated board, a factory shipping board, or an inspection personal computer, A similar process may be performed.

(11) In the first to eleventh embodiments, when the power-on designation command is received while the setting change notification image is being displayed, the message image corresponding to the power-on designation command is displayed while the character being changed is maintained. The output of the background music during startup is stopped (FIG. 67), the character being changed is erased, a message image corresponding to the power-on designation command is displayed, and the output of the background music during startup is maintained (FIG. 67). 138). However, the character being changed may be maintained, a message image corresponding to the power-on designation command may be displayed, and the output of the background music during startup may be stopped. In short, all the processes before receiving the power-on designation command may be ended, and the process corresponding to the power-on designation command may be redone.

(12) In the first to eleventh embodiments, when the power-on designation command is received while the setting confirmation notification image is being displayed, the message image corresponding to the power-on designation command is displayed while the character of the setting confirmation is maintained. The output of the background music during startup is stopped (FIG. 82), the character being changed is erased, a message image corresponding to the power-on designation command is displayed, and the output of the background music during startup is maintained (FIG. 82). 148). However, it is also possible to maintain the character whose setting is being confirmed, display the message image corresponding to the power-on designation command, and stop the output of the background music during startup. In short, all the processes before receiving the power-on designation command may be ended, and the process corresponding to the power-on designation command may be redone.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game machine, 2 ... Game board, 14 ... First starting opening, 14a ... First starting opening detecting switch, 15 ... Second starting opening, 15a ... Second starting opening detecting switch, 16 ... First big winning opening, 16a: first big winning opening detection switch, 17: second big winning opening detection switch, 17a: second big winning opening detection switch, 20: first special symbol display device, 21: second special symbol display device, 31: image display Apparatus, 110: Main control board, 110a: Main CPU, 110b: Main ROM, 110c: Main RAM, 120: Production control board, 120a: Sub CPU, 120b: Sub ROM, 120c: Sub RAM, 150: Image control board

Claims (1)

Each lottery including the jackpot lottery is executed, and the progress of the game is controlled based on the lottery result, and a plurality of types of commands including a game command related to the progress of the game and a special command unrelated to the progress of the game can be generated. Main control means;
Directing means for displaying images and outputting sounds,
A command in the main control means, a control content of the effect means is determined based on the received command, an effect control means for controlling the effect means according to the determination,
Operating means for performing an operation related to the setting of the main control means,
Each of the main control means and the effect control means can perform an independent operation triggered by power-on,
The main control means starts a first initialization process upon power-on, and after the first initialization process is completed, the progress of the game becomes controllable,
The effect control means starts a second initialization process in response to the power-on, and after the second initialization process is completed, a state in which a player can play a game,
The main control means, when the power is turned on by a first activation operation with the operation means in a predetermined state, the main control means shifts to a setting change mode capable of changing settings related to the lottery in the first initialization processing , When the power is turned on by the second activation operation with the operation unit in a predetermined state, the mode shifts to a setting confirmation mode in which the lottery can be confirmed in the first initialization process,
The effect control means displays a game standby image when the second initialization process is started, and when the command received from the main control means while displaying the game standby image is the setting change command, Change the standby image to the setting change image and display it. If the command received from the main control unit during the game standby image is the setting confirmation command, change the game standby image to the setting confirmation image. Display
If the received command is the game command, to disable viewing the setting changed images or the setting confirmation image is displayed when the previous SL main control means has become the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode A gaming machine characterized by that: